Manual Field Servicio Fw740

001317MIURICOH GROUP COMPANIES

SERVICE MANUAL

A163/A251/A252

B047/B048

SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

A163/A

251/A

252/B

047/B

048

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

®

®

A163

FIELD SERVICEMANUAL

001317MIU

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within thisdocument to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of RicohCorporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of theirrespective companies.

They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and forthe benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or website is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Service Manual contains informatio nregarding service techniques, procedures,processes and spare parts of office equipmen tdistributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of thi smanual should be either service trained o rcertified by successfully completing a Rico hTechnical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizin ginformation contained in this service manual t orepair or modify Ricoh equipment risk persona linjury, damage to property. or loss of warrant yprotection.

Ricoh Corporation

WARNING

LEGENDCOMPANYPRODUCT CODE

GESTETNER RICOH SAVINA163 N/A FW740 N/A

A251 N/A FW750 N/A

A252 N/A FW760 N/A

B047 N/A FW770 N/A

B048 N/A FW780 N/A

DOCUMENTATION HISTORYREV. NO. DATE COMMENTS

* Original Printing

1 5/95 Revised Pages

2 5/96 Reprint

3 6/98 A251/A252 Addition

4 8/2001 B047/B048 Addition

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,

make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.

2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.

3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are suppliedwith electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.

4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers offor open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrifiedor mechanically driven components.

5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot whilethe copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components withyour bare hands.

6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard maycause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.

7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turnig toperform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanicaland electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.

2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specifiedintervals.

3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyesby accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eyedrops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

a

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS 1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a

customer service representative who has completed the training course onthose models.

2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium batterywhich can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with anidentical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM pack.Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be handled inaccordance with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL 1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite

suddenly when exposed to open flame.

2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according tolocal regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)

3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not putmore than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

b

Table of Contents

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

COMPONENT LAYOUT AND DESCRIPTIONS

1. PAPER PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. DRUM PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4. DRIVE LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

INSTALLATION

1. ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3 POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

SERVICE TABLES

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

2. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

3. SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

FSM i A163

3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.2 JAM CODE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

6. SERVICE REMARKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.1 DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.1.1 Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.2 CHARGE CORONA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

6.3 OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

6.4 DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

6.6 CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

6.7 FUSING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

6.8 ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.9 PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.10 ROLL FEEDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

6.11 OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. EXTERIOR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1.1 Left Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1.2 Left Lower Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2.1 Right Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers . . 5-1

1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.3.1 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

2. OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Rev. 9/27/96

A163 ii FSM

2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

3. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

4. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5. FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

6. T & S CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

FSM iii A163

6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . 5-34

6.2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

7. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

1.6 PAPER CREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

A163 iv FSM

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

ROLL FEEDER

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . 7-2

3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

4.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

4.3 CUTTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

5. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1.1 Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1.2 Left and Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 7-19

7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ± 3 mm (for length shorter than 420 mm) ± 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

FSM v A163

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1. SPECIFICATIONSConfiguration: Table top

Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system

Original Feed: Sheet feed

Original Size: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mmMinimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise

Copy Size: Same as "Original Size"

Copying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)

First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)

Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)

Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only

Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be setto 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)

Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum

Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)

Reproduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)

Exposure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array

Exposure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)

Development: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2bags)

Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)

Toner Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)

Development Bias: Negative

Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by inductionsensor

Image Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control

Paper Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls

Cleaning: Cleaning blade

Rev. 11/2000

Original Skew 2 mm/400mmTolerance:

⇒

Ove

rall

Mac

hin

eIn

form

atio

n

FSM 1-1 A163

Paper Feeding: Manual feed (roll feeder optional)

Image Fusing: Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and siliconerubber (lower) rollers

Fusing Lamp: Nichrome wire lamp(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)

Self-diagnostic Codes: 11 codes, displayed in copy counter

Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz....15 A220 V/50 Hz....7 A230 V/50Hz.....7 A240 V/50 Hz....7 A

Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kW Warm-up: 1.2 kWReady: 0.04 to 1.2 kW Copy cycle: 1.3 kW

Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"

Weight: 76 kg, 167.4 lb

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

ConfigurationAdditional equipment

Main frame Optional equipment

A163 copierRoll feeder (A571) Table (A714)Roll cutting rail (A570) --Side guides (A569) --

Other Optional Equipment

• Paper Spool• Drum anti-condensation heater

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

A163 1-2 FSM

COMPONENT LAYOUT ANDDESCRIPTION

1. PAPER PATH

A: Original Path

B: Paper from the manual feed

C: Paper from the roller feed

D: Paper exit

E: Original Path from Rear Feeder

D

A

B

C

E

A163 2-1 FSM

2. DRUM PROCESSES

1. ChargeIn the dark the charge corona unit applies a negative charge to the drum. Thegrid wire ensures the charge is applied uniformly. The charge remains on thesurface of the drum because the photoconductive drum has a high electricalresistance in the dark.

2. ExposureHigh intensity light from a fluorescent lamp is reflected from the moving originalthrough the fiber optic array. The charge on the drum surface is dissipated indirect proportion to the intensity of the reflected light, thus producing an electriclatent image on the drum surface.

Rev. 5/95

12

3

4

5 6

7

8

FSM 2-2 A163

3. DevelopmentThe magnetic developer brush on the development roller comes in contact withthe latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostaticallyattracted to the negatively charged latent image areas.

4. Pre-Transfer LampThe pre-transfer lamp (PTL) illuminates the drum prior to image transfer. Thisreduces the attraction between the toner and the drum, thus making imagetransfer easier.

5. Image TransferCopy paper is fed to the drum surface, at the exact timing, to align the copypaper and the developed image on the drum surface. Then a strong negativecharge is applied to the back side of the paper. The negative charge pulls thetoner particles from the drum surface onto the paper.

6. Paper SeparationA strong ac corona discharge is applied to the back side of the copy paper,reducing the charge on the paper and breaking the electrostatic attractionbetween the paper and the drum. Then, the stiffness of the copy paper causes itto separate from the drum. The pick-off pawls help to separate paper which haslow stiffness.

7. CleaningThe cleaning blade, which is angled against drum rotation (counter bladesystem), removes any toner remaining on the drum surface.

8. QuenchingThe light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the surface of the drum.

A163 2-3 FSM

3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

12521

22 23 24

20

191817

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

32

FSM 2-4 A163

1. 1st Original Feed Roller

2. 1st Press Rollers

3. Copy Tray

4. Exit Rollers

5. Fusing Exit Rollers

6. Hot Roller

7. Pressure Roller

8. Gas Spring

9. OPC Drum

10. T/S Corona Unit

11. Main Drive Unit

12. Table

13. Paper Spool

14. Roll Feeder

15. Paper Registration Rollers

16. Development Unit

17. Toner Cartridge

18. Manual Feed Table

19. Charge Corona Unit

20. 2nd Original Feed Roller

21. Original Table

22. 2nd Press Rollers

23. Exposure Lamp

24. Fiber Optic Array

25. Cleaning Blade

A163 2-5 FSM

4. DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Original Feed Roller Pulley

2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pully

3. Development Unit

4. Development Unit Relay Gear

5. Development Drive Chain

6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch

7. Drum Drive Relay Gear

8. Main Motor

9. Fusing Drive Chain

10. Exit Unit Drive Belt

11. Hot Roller Drive Gear

12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear

13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear

14. Drum Drive Gear

15. Original Feed Drive Pulley

16. Original Feed Drive Belt

9 8 7

6

5

4

32161514

131211

10

1

FSM 2-6 A163

5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONSRefer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point(Water proof paper) index numbers.

Name Function Index. No.Motors

Main Drives all mechanical components except thefans. (DC Motor) 32

Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drumsection to the ozone filter. (DC Motor) 5

Magnetic Clutches

Registration Drives the registration rollers. 30

Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

Solenoids

Pick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

Switches

Main Supplies power to the copier. 17

Original & PaperFeed Safety

Cuts ac power when the original or paper feedunit is opened. 18

Fusing ExitSafety

Cuts ac power when the fusing exit unit isopened. 12

Sensors

Door Open Indicates "Door Open" in the operation paneland prohibits the key operation. 29

Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26

OriginalRegistration

Detects when the original lead edge passes atthe front of the exposure glass. 4

Light Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output. 27

Entrance Feed Detects when copy paper is inserted (jamdetector).

24

A163 2-7 FSM

Name Function Index. No.Registration Detects when copy paper arrives at the

registration rollers (jam detector). 25

Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7

Printed Circuit Boards

Main Controls all copier functions both directly andthrough other PCBs. 22

PSU Converts the ac voltage to dc voltage. 21

AC Drive Provides ac power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15

FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23

Operation Panel Control the operation panel display. 10

Lamps

Exposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image ontothe drum (fluorescent lamp). 2

Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3

Pre-Transfer(PTL)

Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior toimage transfer. 20

Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drumsurface after cleaning. 1

Power Packs

Charge/Bias/GridPower Pack

Provides high voltage power for the chargecorona, charge grid, and development bias. 19

Transfer/Separation

Provides high voltage power for the transfercorona and separation. 16

Thermistors

Hot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8

Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surfacetemperature. 11

Thermofuses

Fusing Protects against fusing overheat. 9

Heaters

FSM 2-8 A163

Name Function Index. No.Anticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier

(option). 13

Others

Total Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.). 28

Circuit Breaker(Europe, Asia)/Fuse (U.S.A.)

Guards against voltage surges in the inputpower. 14

A163 2-9 FSM

FSM 2-10 A163

INSTALLATION

1. ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF)

2. Humidity Range: 20% to 80% RH

3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 Lux (do not expose todirect sunlight).

4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3

Room air should turn over at least 30m3/hr/person.

5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)

6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine asfollows:

a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes fromlow to high, or vice versa.

b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditionerin the summer.

c) Where it will be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heaterin the winter.

7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.

8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.

9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.

10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strongvibration.

FSM 3-1 A163

1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL 1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenter’s level.

Back600 mm

Right600 mm

Front1000 mm

Left600 mm

A163 3-2 FSM

1.3 POWER SOURCE1. Input Voltage Level: 115 V/60 Hz

More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 V/230 V/240 V/50 HzMore than 7 A (for European version)

2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation: ±10%

3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

NOTE: a) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

b) Avoid multi-wiring.

FSM 3-3 A163

1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Copier

Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:Guide Wire .............................................................2 pcs

Copy Tray ...............................................................1 pc

Copy Guide ............................................................1 pc

A163 3-4 FSM

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is beinginstalled on the table.

2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the tableholes [E]).

Warning: The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copiertoo hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While movingthe copier, push the table.

[E]

[A]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[D]

FSM 3-5 A163

3. Open the paper path section [A] and remove two strips of shipping tape [B].

4. Remove the right upper cover [C] (2 screws).

5. Remove the drum protection sheet [D], and remove the screw [E] to applycleaning blade pressure to the drum. Remove paper from transport section.Close the paper path section.

[A]

[B]

[C]

Rev. 5/95

[D][E]

A163 3-6 FSM

6. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover[C]. Remove a sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of thedeveloper [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown,then close all doors.

7. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

[A]

[C]

[B]

[E]

Rev. 5/95

[D]

FSM 3-7 A163

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C when the main switch isturned on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary toaccess the SP mode when loading the second Kg of developer (in step 11).Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer isloaded from the development entrance.

8. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear Mode key [A]+ key [B]+ keyClear/Stop key [C]

9. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench andtoner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).

10. Select 23 using the + key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The mainmotor will rotate.

11. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loadedfrom the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into thedevelopment unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 Kg). Press the ClearModes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

Rev. 5/95

[D] [B]

[A]

[C]

[E]

A163 3-8 FSM

12. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear key [A]+ key [B]--key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]

13. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper endand call service indicators will blink (SP mode).

14. Select 36 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F]Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operatingmode from SP mode. (New developer initialization)

Rev. 5/95

[C] [B]

[A]

[D]

[F][E]

FSM 3-9 A163

15. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

16. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until itstops.

[A]

[B]

[C]

A163 3-10 FSM

17. Attach the guide wires [A] to the copy tray [B].

18. Install the copy tray [B] and copy guide [C].

19. Reinstall all the covers.

20. Check the copy quality and copier operation.

[C]

[A]

[B]

FSM 3-11 A163


Table

Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:Top Plate ................................................................ 1

Left Side Plate ........................................................ 1

Right Side Plate ..................................................... 1

Middle Plate ........................................................... 1

Rear Cover ............................................................. 1

Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 .......................14

A163 3-12 FSM

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces aroundthe screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two componentsmeet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of theleft plate.

1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).

2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.

3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).

4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.

5. Flip the table the correct way.

[E]

[D]

[C]

[H]

Rev. 5/95

[G]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D] [A]

[A][A]

[A]

[A]

[B]

A, B

FSM 3-13 A163

1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Roll Cutting Rail

Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:Cutter Guide ...........................................................1 pc

Cutter Knife ............................................................1 pc

Roll Paper Arm .......................................................2 pcs

Roll Paper Shaft .....................................................1 pc

Roll Shaft Holder ....................................................2 pcs

Roll Flange .............................................................2 pcs

1. Remove the small caps [A] from the lower front cover.

2. Attach the roll shaft holders [B] as shown.

[A][B]

[B]

[A]

A163 3-14 FSM

3. Attach the roll paper arms [A] to the cutter guide [B]. (Install each arm pin [C]into each cutter guide hole [D]. Position the cutter guide pin [E] in the lowerslot of the roll paper arm [F].)

4. Install the cutter guide on the roll shaft holder [G].

5. Slide the roll paper shaft [H] into the roll paper.

6. Fit the roll flanges [I] onto the roll paper shaft (both ends).

7. Push the roll flanges [I] inside to fix the roll paper position.

8. Set the roll paper shaft on the roll shaft holder.

9. Set the paper between the cutter guide stay [J] and slide shafts [K].

10. Check the roll cutting rail operation.

[H][I][I]

[J] [G]

[G]

[A][C] [F]

[E]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[A]

[K]

[H]

FSM 3-15 A163

SERVICE TABLES

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE1.1 PM TABLE Symbol key: I=Inspect L=Lubricate R=Replace A=Adjust C=Clean

EM2.1KM(3.6K)

4.3KM(7.2K)

6.4KM(10.8K)

8.6KM(14.4K)

10.8KM(18K) Notes

( ) A1 sideways/D sizeA. Original Feed1 First original

feed roller C C Alcohol

2 Secondoriginal feedroller

C CAlcohol

3 1st and 2ndpress rollers I C I C I Alcohol

4 Original table C C C C C AlcoholB. Optics1 Fiber optics

arrayClean withlens paper ifnecessary

2 Exposure lamp Clean usingwater ifnecessary

3 Exposure glass C C C C C C Water oralcohol

4 Reflection plate C C C C C C AlcoholC. Development1 Developer Replace at 20K

(A1 sideways/D size)

2 Cartridgeholder

Clean using adry cloth ifnecessary

3 Entrance seal Clean using adry cloth ifnecessary

4 Developmentfilter

Clean at 60K(A1 sideways/D size)

D. Around drum1 Corona wires C C C C R Dry cloth2 Grid wires C C C C C Dry cloth3 Charge corona

end blocks andcasing

C CDry cloth

4 Pre-transferlamp C

Clean usingblower brush ifnecessary

FSM 4-1 A163

EM2.1KM(3.6K)

4.3KM(7.2K)

6.4KM(10.8K)

8.6KM(14.4K)

10.8KM(18K) Notes

( ) A1 sideways/D size5 T/S corona

wires C C C C R Dry cloth

6 T/S coronaend blocks andcasing

C C C C CDry cloth

7 Pick-off pawls C C C C C Dry cloth8 Quenching

Lamp CClean usingblower brush ifnecessary

E. Cleaning1 Cleaning blade

I I I I I

Replace at20K (A1 sideways/D size)

2 Cleaning seal I I I I I Replace ifdamaged

3 Toner tank I I I I I Empty usedtoner

F. Paper Feed1 Registration

roller C C C C C Water

2 Paper feedguide plate C C C C C Water

3 Manual feedtable C C C C C Water

G. Fusing1 Hot roller Replace at

48K(A1 sideways/D size)

2 Pressure roller Replace at 60K(A1 sideways/D size)

3 Thermistors C Clean usingsuitable solvent

4 Hot rollerstrippers C Clean using

suitable solvent5 Pressure roller

stripper C C C C C Clean usingsuitable solvent

6 Entrance guideplate

Clean usingsuitablesolvent ifnecessary

7 Exit turn guide C C C C C Clean usingalcohol

A163 4-2 FSM

EM2.1KM(3.6K)

4.3KM(7.2K)

6.4KM(10.8K)

8.6KM(14.4K)

10.8KM(18K) Notes

( ) A1 sideways/D size8 Exit guide plate Clean using

suitablesolvent ifnecessary

Others1 Chain

I I I I ILubricate withG501 ifnecessary

2 GearsI I I I I

Lubricate withG501 ifnecessary

3 Ozone filter R R R R R

F. Roll Feeder1 Feed Roller C C C C C Alcohol

FSM 4-3 A163

1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE

1. Make a copy Make a copy of OS-A1 chart.

2. Original Feed (every 3.6K)

Clean the original table using alcohol.Inspect the 1st and 2nd press rollers. If they are dirty,clean them using alcohol.

Original Feed (every 7.2K)

1. Clean the first and second original feed rollersusing alcohol.

2. Clean the first and second press rollers usingalcohol.

3. Optics (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the reflection plate using alcohol.

2. Clean the exposure glass using water.

3. Clean the exposure lamp using water if necessary.

4. Clean the fiber optics array using lens paper ifnecessary.

4. Around Drum (every 3.6K)

NOTE: After removing the drum, wrap it in clear sheets of paper to protect it.

1. Clean the charge corona wire, T& S corona wiresand grid wires using a dry cloth. (Do not expandthe corona wires.)

2. Clean the T/S corona end blocks, casing using adry cloth.

3. Clean the pick-off pawls using a dry cloth.

4. Clean the pre-transfer lamp if it is dirty.

5. Clean the quenching lamp if it is dirty.

A163 4-4 FSM

Around Drum(every 7.2K)

Clean the charge corona end blocks and casing.

Around Drum(every 18K)

Replace the charge corona wires and T/S coronawires.

5. Cleaning Unit (every 3.6K)

1. Inspect the cleaning blade. Replace it, if it isdamaged.

2. Inspect the cleaning seal. Replace it, if it isdamaged.

Cleaning Unit(every 20K)

Replace the cleaning blade.

6. Development Unit (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the cartridge holder using a dry cloth if it isdirty.

2. Clean the entrance seal using a dry cloth if it isdirty.

Development Unit(every 30K)

Replace the developer.

Development Unit(every 60K)

Clean the development filter.

FSM 4-5 A163

7. Paper Feed (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the registration roller using water.

2. Clean the paper feed guide plates using water.

3. Clean the manual table using water.

8. Fusing Unit (every 3.6K)

Clean the small separation rollers using suitablesolvent.

Fusing Unit (every 6.4K)

1. Clean the fusing thermistors using suitablesolvent.

2. Clean the hot roller strippers using suitablesolvent.

Fusing Unit (every 48K)

Replace the hot roller.

9. Others (every 3.6K)

1. Inspect the drive chain. Lubricate using G501 ifnecessary.

2. Inspect the drive gears. Lubricate using G501 ifnecessary.

3. Replace the ozone filter.

10. Roll Feeder (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the feed roller using alcohol.

11. Copy Quality. 1. Check the copy quality.

2. Perform the light sensor adjustment.

A163 4-6 FSM

2. SERVICE TABLES2.1 TEST POINTSMain Board

Number FunctionTP101 VAA (+24V)TP102 Vcc (+5V)TP103 GNDTP104 Toner density sensor (CN104-A10)TP105 Light sensor output (CN104-B1)

Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number FunctionTP1 Development Bias VoltageTP2 Grid Voltage

2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORSCharge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number FunctionVR1 Charge Corona Voltage

Caution: VR1 should not be changed in the field. Charge corona can be adjusted using SP #--10.

T&S Power Pack

Number FunctionVRT Transfer Corona Voltage

VRD (DC) Separation Corona Voltage (DC)VRD (AC) Separation Corona Voltage (AC)

Caution: VRT, VRD (DC), and VRD (AC) should not be changed in the field. They can be adjusted using SP #--12 to --17.

FSM 4-7 A163

3. SERVICE TOOLS3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODEThe service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change mode oradjustment values.

3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure

How to access the SP mode for service representatives (All service programmodes can be accessed with this procedure.)Press the following keys in sequence.

→ → → →

The second time that the key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3seconds (until the and indicators blink).

How to access the SP mode for customers and sales representatives (SPmodes 1 to 35 are accessible by a customer with this procedure.)

Press key then hold down key more than 3 seconds (until the and indicators blink).

How to leave the SP modePress the following keys in sequence

→ →

or turn off the main switch.

NOTE: Each of the above procedure must be finished within 20 seconds.

How to select the program number

The program number can be selected by the and keys. Theselected program number is displayed in the lead edge erase indicator (the twodigit indicator beside the mark).To select the program number quickly, hold down or key.

A163 4-8 FSM

How to change settings 1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.

2. Press the key to select the paper length indicator (the four digitindicator beside the mark).

3. The present setting is displayed in the paper length indicator.

4. Select the setting using the and keys, then press the key to enter the selected setting.

5. Leave the SP mode.

How to read data 1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.

2. Press the key and select the paper length indicator (the four digitindicator beside the mark).

3. Press the key, then the paper length indicator shows the data.

4. Press key again to stop displaying the data.

FSM 4-9 A163

3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table

1: A "*" before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by custormers or sales representative.2: In the data colum, the default value is printed in bold letters. The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer to page 4-26.).

Mode No. Function Data

*1

FusingTemperature 1(Normal)

Selects the fusing temperature for plainpaper.

0: Mode 11: Mode 22: Mode 33: Mode 44: Mode 55: Mode 66: Mode 7

*2

FusingTemperature 2(High)

Selects the fusing temperature for translucentpaper.

0: Mode 51: Mode 62: Mode 73: Mode 8

*3

FusingTemperature 3(Low)

Selects the fusing temperature for translucentfilm.


*4 Copy CountUp/Down

Selects the copy count amount up or down. 0: Up1: Down

*5

Beeper On/Off Selects if the beeper sounds or not. 0: On1: Off2: Only when the edge margin or paper length is changed continuously, the beeper is off.

*6

Paper Feed OutWaiting TimeSetting

Selects the time to when the paper isautomatically fed out after it has been set onthe manual table, or after the Roll FeedSelect key is pressed.

0: 2 minutes1: 1 minute2: 3 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes

*7

Manual Feed StartTime Setting

Selects the time to when the registrationroller starts rotating after the entrance sensordetects the paper leading edge.

0: 2 seconds1: 0.7 second2: 1 second3: 3 seconds4: 4 seconds5: 5 seconds

A163 4-10 FSM


*8

Leading EdgeIncrease/Decrease Speed Setting

To change the leading edge margin (printnumber) increase/decrease speed, thecustomer holds down the + or -- key. Then,after a few 0.25 second intervals (See SPmode 12), the speed begins to change. SPmode 8 determines the rate of speedincrease/decrease.

Count up/down atevery:0: 0.1 second1: 0.50 second2: 0.25 second3: 0.05 second4: 0.02 second

*9

Auto Reset TimeSetting

Selects the time to return to the initial setting. 0: 2 minutes1: 1 minutes2: 3 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes5: No auto reset

*10Auto EnergySaver Mode

The machine goes into energy saver mode atauto reset time.

0: No1: Auto Energy Saver Mode

*11

Screen MessageSetting

Selects one of the options indicated on thedisplay in the energy saver mode.

0: None1: Pre-HEAt2: HEllo i lovE yoU3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 94: SLEEPinG5: HAvE A Good dAy.

*12

Leading EdgeIncrease/Decrease AdjustmentPreliminary Interval

The leading edge margin (print number,paper length) increase/decrease speed startsto change several 0.25 second intervals afterthe customer starts the adjustmentprocedure. This SP mode adjusts thenumber of 0.25 second intervals.

0: 3 intervals1: 1 intervals2: 2 intervals3: 10 intervals

13 Not Used

14 Not Used

15Auto Off Auto off time can be selected 1 ~ 120 minutes

(1 minute per step)Default: 30 minutes

16 to19

Not Used

*20

Paper LengthCount Up/DownSetting

Selects if the paper length is in count down orup when the preset cut key is pressed.

0: Down (Long → Short)1: Up (Short → Long)

*21

Paper LengthUp/Down SpeedSetting

To change the paper lengthincrease/decrease speed, the customer holdsdown the + or -- key. Then, after a few 0.25second intervals (See SP mode 12), thespeed begins to change. SP mode 21determines the rate of speedincrease/decrease.

0: 0.10 second1: 0.5 second2: 0.25 second3: 0.05 second4: 0.02 second5: 0.01 second

*22Fixed Paper SizePattern Setting

Selects the fixed paper size pattern chosenwhen the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

Refer to page 4-25.

*23to

*32

Optional PaperSize Setting

Up to 10 different paper size can be storedfrom 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.22, this data is used as fixed paper size whenthe "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

UdEF: Undefined

Rev. 1/26/96

⇒

FSM 4-11 A163


*23to

*32


Up to 10 different paper size can be storedfrom 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.22, this data is used as fixed paper size whenthe "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

UdEF: Undefined

33 to34

Not Used

*35All Indicators On Turns on all the indicators on the operation

panel when the Roll Feed Select key ispressed.

0: No1: All indicators on

36

New DeveloperInitialization

Carries out the new developer initialization for5 minutes. The machine counts down theremaining time on the display. After theinitialization, the machine automaticallyadjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 ± 0.1V.During the toner sensor adjustment, "Adj" isdisplayed. When the adjustment iscompleted, the machine automatically returnsto normal operating mode.

If the initialization iscanceled beforereturning to thenormal operatingmode, do it againfrom the beginning. Ifthe machine fails toadjust the tonersensor output, "E=11"is indicated.

37 Not Used

38Release FusingUnit Service Call

Recovers from the fusing unit SC condition.After it has been recovered, the machinereturns to its initial (power on) condition.

0: Release SC1: SC condition

39 Not Used

40Roll FeederIdentification

Identify the roll feeder installation. 0: No1: Roll Feeder Installed

41Roll FeederSpeed Setting(Factory Use)

To adjust the paper feed speed of the rollfeeder.

0: Standard--50 ← 0 → 50Faster Slower

42

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (300mm, Plain Paper)

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in theplain paper mode.

0: Standard--9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mmLonger Shorter

43

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (300mm, TranslucentPaper)

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in thetranslucent paper mode.

44

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (300mm, translucentFilm)

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in thetranslucent film mode.

Rev. 12/22/95

A163 4-12 FSM


45

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (1100mm, Plain Paper)

To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm inthe plain paper mode.

0: Standard--50.0←0→ 50.0 mmLonger Shorter

46

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (1100mm, translucentPaper)

To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm inthe translucent paper mode.

47

Roll FeederCutting LengthAdjustment (1100mm, TranslucentFilm)

To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm inthe translucent film mode.

48 Not Used

49

Main Motor SpeedAdjustment

To change the main motor speed. 0: Standard --9 ← 0 → 11Slower FasterIf the main motorspeed is incorrect,PJ56 or PJ57 will beindicated when a longcopy is made. Inthese cases thisadjustment isrequired.

50

Toner EndDetection Setting

Determines the possible number of copies(when A1 paper is used) after the toner nearend condition.

0: 27 sheets1: 9 sheets2: 18 sheets3: 36 sheets

51

Used Toner Determines the total copy length before thetoner overflow indicator lights.

0: 12201: 6102: 9153: 10004: 14645: 18306: 20007: 24408: No overflow indication9: 10m (Should be used for test)

52

Used TonerCounter

Indicates the copy length after clearing theused toner counter. This counter isautomatically cleared if the clear mode key ispressed after turning off and on the mainswitch in the full toner condition.

tF=XX,XXX(Beeper)

FSM 4-13 A163


53

Used TonerCounter Clear

Clear used toner counter. 0: Full toner condition is not detected1: Full toner condition is detected.To clear the counter,input "0" even if "0" isalready indicated.

54

DeveloperWarm-up Setting

Determines the warm-up time to increase theQ/M of the developer. This warm-up is doneif the fusing temperature is lower than 60°Cwhen the main switch is turned on.

0: 1 minute1: 2 minute2: 3 minute3: None

55

Paper LengthLimit Setting

Determines the maximum paper length.Note:If paper longer than 2000 mm is used, skewcopy, poor fusing, crease copy originaldamage might occur.

(In mm mode)0: 2000 mm1: 3600 mm2: 5200 mm3: 6800 mm4: 8400 mm5: 9999 mm

(In inch mode)0: 80.0 inch1: 160.0 inch2: 240.0 inch3: 320.0 inch4: 400.0 inch5: 480.0 inch

56

Copy NumberLimit Setting

Determines the maximum copy number. 0: 99 sheets1: 10 sheets2: 20 sheets3: 30 sheets4: 40 sheets5: 50 sheets6: 67 sheets7: 70 sheets8: 80 sheets9: 90 sheets

57to58

Not Used

59Misfeed SpecialRecovery Mode

While the Emergency Stop key is held down,the main motor and the registration clutch areenergized.

0: No1: Misfeed Special Recovery Mode

60

Fixed PaperLength SpecialMode

Each time +/-- key is pressed while holdingthe Preset Cut key down, the length selectedin SP mode 61 is increased/reduced from thepreset paper size.

0: Normal1: Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

A163 4-14 FSM


61

Fixed PaperLength SpecialMode

Selects the interval of each step for SP60. (In mm mode)0: 100 mm1: 50 mm2: 60 mm3: 120 mm4: 200 mm5: 240 mm6: 250 mm7: 500 mm8: 600 mm

(In inch mode)0: 10.0 inch1: 5.0 inch2: 6.0 inch3: 12.0 inch4: 20.0 inch5: 24.0 inch6: 25.0 inch7: 50.0 inch8: 60.0 inch

62

Special TonerSupply Mode

In the energy saver mode, 10% toner supplyis done while the "Emergency Stop" key ispressed. Toner sensor voltage is displayedon the "Paper Length" indicator. If the voltageis lower than 1V, toner is not supplied.

0: No1: Special Toner Supply Mode

63 Not Used

64

SP Mode DisplaySpeed Setting

Selects the indication speed on the display. 0: 300 ms/letter1: 100 ms/letter2: 200 ms/letter3: 400 ms/letter4: 500 ms/letter

65

ROM VersionDisplay

Indicates the ROM version. Example: vEr_1994_06_06_01

66

RAM AbnormalCondition Check

Displays the total number of abnormalconditions of the back-up RAM.

A number is added ifan abnormal RAMcondition is detectedwhen the machine ispowered on.

67to69

Not Used

Year

MonthDate

Internal Use Only

FSM 4-15 A163


70to75

Total CopyLength/NumberDisplay

Displays the total copy length/numberaccording to the following units. SP70 = Yard SP71 = meter SP72 = 100 inches SP73 = 50 inches SP74 = A1 length (594 mm) SP75 = sheet (any size)

SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX SP71: t1=XXX,XXX SP72: t2=XXX,XXXSP73: t3=XXX,XXXSP74: t4=XXX,XXXSP75: t5=XXX,XXX

76

OPC Counter Displays the total length of copied paper afterthe OPC drum is installed.

do = XX,XXXThis counter shouldbe cleared when theOPC drum isreplaced. (SP #--1)

77

DeveloperCounter Display

Displays the total length [m] of copied paperafter the new developer is poured.

dE = XX,XXXThis counter isautomatically clearedwhen the newdeveloperinitialization is done.

78

Toner CounterDisplay

Displays the total length of copied paper [m]after a new toner cartridge is installed.

dt = XX,XXXThis counter isautomatically clearedwhen the new tonercartridge is installed.

79

Toner SupplyLevel Indication

Indicates the present toner sensor level. dL = ab -- -- ca: Toner density setting n, H, Lb: TS level 0 ~ 5c: Copy number step 0: ~30m 1: ~60m 3: ~90m 4: ~120m 5: ~150m 6: 150m ~

80to85

Number ofMisfeeds byLocation

Displays the total number of paper misfeedsby location. Misfeed location codes displayedin each SP number are as follows:SP80: Jt, J90, J98, J99SP81: J01, J02, J03, J04SP82: J20, J21, J22, J23SP83: J30, J31, J32SP84: J40, J41, J42, J43SP85: J56, J57, J58, J59

J = XXXJt = Total Jam

A163 4-16 FSM


86

Misfeed RecordDisplay

Displays the locations of the last fivemisfeeds one after the other.

J1 = XX (Last jam) ↓J2 = XX (1 before the last jam) ↓J3 = XX (2 before the last jam) ↓J4 = XX (3 before the last jam) ↓J5 = XX (4 before the last jam) ↓Beeper(XX = Jam Location)

87to89

Not Used

90to92

Number ofService Calls byLocation

Displays the total number of service calls(SC) by location. SC codes displayed in eachSP number are as follows:SP90: Et, E1, E9, E10, E11SP91: E2, E3, E4, E5SP92: E6, E7, E8

E = XXXEt = Total SCs

93

Service CallRecords

Displays the last five service calls one afterthe other.

E1 = XX (The last error code) ↓E2 = XX (1 before the last error code) ↓E3 = XX (2 before the last error code) ↓E4 = XX (3 before the last error code) ↓E5 = XX (4 before the last error code) ↓Beeper(XX= Error Code)

94to99

Not Used

FSM 4-17 A163


--1

RAM Clear Clears selected data items form the RAM. Toclear the memory, input the number of theitem you want to delete, then press the

key.Note:If all the memory is cleared (if a number from20 to 28 is selected), reinput the factorysettings that are shown on the decal attachedinside the upper right cover.Please refer to page 4-26 to know the defaultsettings for each destination. (When No. 10to 26 is selected.)

0: Not Used1: Copy Number Counter (The memory for SP75)2: Copy Length Counter (SP70 to 74)3: OPC Counter (SP76)4: Developer Counter (SP77)(*Note1)

5: Toner Counter (SP78)6: Counter for toner density step.(*Note2)

7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53.8: SC Counter (SP90 to 93)9: Jam Counter (SP80 to 86)10: Not Used

* Note: 1This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described onpage 2-16).* Note: 2For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization isdone, this counter to 150 and after 150m of copies, the counter stays at 0.If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

A163 4-18 FSM


--1

11: Change the setting to the U.S.A. version

12: Not Used

13: Not Used

14: Not Used

15: Not Used

16: Not Used

17: Factory use

18: Not Used

19: Not Used

20: Not Used

21: Clear all the memories and change the setting to the U.S.A version

22: Not Used

23: Not Used

24: Not Used

25: Not Used

--1

26: Not Used

27: Factory use28: Clear all the memories

--2

Total Counter UnitSetting

Selects the unit in which the total countercounts up by.

0: 1 yard1: 1 m2: 100 inches3: 50 inches4: A1 length (594 mm)5. Sheet (Any size)

--3 Inch/mmExchange

Selects the unit in which the edge margin andpaper length is indicated by.

0: mm1: Inch

--4 Not Used

--5RegistrationAdjustment

Adjusts the paper registration. 0: Standard--9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mmAdvance Delay

FSM 4-19 A163


--6

Light SensorAdjustment

Change the light sensor setting.Turn on and off the exposure lamp using theCopy Media key.Tracing paper: ONFilm: OFF

50: Standard 0 ← 50 → 99Darker Lighter

--7Hot RollerTemperatureAdjustment

Change the hot roller temperature setting. 0: Standard --9 ← 0 → 9°CDecrease Increase

--8Pressure RollerTemperatureAdjustment

Change the pressure roller temperaturesetting.

0: Standard --9 ← 0 → 9°CDecrease Increase

--9

Hot Roller/Pressure RollerTemperatureDisplay

Displays the hot roller temperature andpressure roller temperature.Even if the SP mode is canceled when thetemperature is displayed, the temperature iscontinuously displayed during stand-bycondition or copy cycle.To release this condition, turn the mainswitch off and on.

Fu = XXXPr = XXXFu: Hot roller temperaturePr: Pressure roller temperatureIf the hot roller temperature

is lower than 100°C(pressure rollertemperature is lowerthan 50°C), "LLL" isindicated.If the hot rollertemperature is higherthan 210°C (pressureroller temperature ishigher than 180°C),"HHH" is indicated.

--10

Drum ChargeSetting

Determines the drum charge voltage. In this mode, the charge corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF

200: Standard150 ← 200 → 249Low High

--11

Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage.In this mode, the grid voltage can be turnedon and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF

9: Standard 0 ← 9 → 15Low High

--12

Transfer CoronaVoltage Setting

Determines the transfer corona voltage.In this mode, the transfer corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--13

Transfer Voltageat Paper TrailingEdge Setting

Determines the transfer corona voltage at thepaper trailing edge.In this mode, the transfer corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


A163 4-20 FSM


--14

Separation ACVoltage Setting

Determines the AC separation coronavoltage.In this mode, the separation corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--15

Separation ACVoltage at thePaper LeadingEdge Setting

Determines the AC separation coronavoltage at the paper leading edge.In this mode, the separation corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--16

Separation DCVoltage Setting

Determines the DC separation coronavoltage.In this mode, the separation corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--17

Separation DCVoltage at thePaper LeadingEdge Setting

Determines the DC separation coronavoltage at the paper leading edge.In this mode, the separation corona can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--18to

--19

Not Used

--20

Bias Voltage forthe Image AreaSetting

Determines the development bias voltage forthe image area.In this mode, the bias voltage can be turnedon and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--21

Bias Voltage forNon-image AreaSetting

Determines the development bias voltage forthe non-image area.In this mode, the bias voltage can be turnedon and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


FSM 4-21 A163


--22

Toner DensitySetting

Selects the toner density setting. The tonerdensity changes according to the copy lengthafter the developer is replaced.

0: Standard1: Low2: High

23to24

Not Used

--30

Toner DensitySensor VoltageSetting

Changes the toner density sensor voltage.Normally, the value is automatically adjustedwhen the new developer initialization (SP36)is done.In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and thebias voltage for non-image area can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


--31Toner SensorVoltage Display(Last Copy)

Displays the toner sensor output voltage forthe last copy.

A = X,XX(Beeper)

Copy length(A1 size) Std. Low High

~ 30 m(~50 sheets) 4.25V 4.35V 4.00V

~ 60 m(~100 sheets) 4.00V 4.30V 3.50V

~ 90 m(~150 sheets) 3.50V 4.25V 3.00V

~ 120 m(~200 sheets) 3.00V 3.75V 2.50V

~ 150 m(~250 sheets) 2.50V 3.25V 2.00V

A163 4-22 FSM


--32

Toner SensorVoltage Display(Real Time)

Displays the real time toner sensor outputvoltage.In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL andthe bias voltage for non-image areas can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFFEven if the SP mode is canceled when thevoltage is displayed, the voltage is displayedduring the stand-by condition or copy cycling(the toner sensor output voltage, paperlength and copy counter are displayed oneafter the other).To release this condition, turn the mainswitch off and on.

A = X,XX

A = Toner SensorVoltage

During the stand-bycondition, and copycycling the followingdata is displayed.A=X,XX ↓LE=X,XXX ↓CO=XX ↓(Beeper)

LE = Paper Length(ex. 297 mm: LE=0.29712 inch: LE=0.120)CO=Copy counter

--33to

--44

Not Used

--50

Forced ReadyCondition(Factory Use)

Goes to "Ready" condition ignoring the fusingtemperature. This mode cannot be usedduring the development idling.

0: Normal1: Forced Ready Condition

--51 Lamp Off Mode Fluorescent lamp does not turn on during thecopy cycle.

0: Normal1: Lamp off

--52No MisfeedDetection Mode

Ignores jam detections except for initialjams. The setting automatically returns to "0"when the main switch is turned off.

0: Normal1: No Misfeed Detection

--53

Free Run Mode The machine caries out copy operationwithout an original. This mode can be used ifthe optional roll feeder is installed andselected paper length is more than 594mm.The machine starts operation when the rollfeed select key is pressed, and stops whenthe Emergency Stop key is pressed.

0: Normal1: Next Paper is fed when the fusing exit sensor is deactivated.2~250: Next paper isfed (X-1) secondsafter the fusing exitsensor is deactivated.X = Input Number

--54to

--59

Not Used

--60

Fluorescent LampAbnormal TimeCheck 1

Counts the time when the exposure sensor ismore than 1 V higher than the target value.

0~250: The total time(seconds) that thelamp voltage is morethan 1 volt higherthan the target value.

FSM 4-23 A163


--61


Counts the time when the fluorescent lamp isin full power during the copy cycle.

0~250: The total time(seconds) that thefluorescent lamp is atfull power.

--62 Not Used--63 Factory Use Only

--64Manual FeedAttention Mode 1

Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on themanual feed table before the "Set Paper"indicator lights.

0: NO1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 1

--65Manual FeedAttention Mode 2

Beeper sounds when the manual table isready to accept the next sheet.

0: NO1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 2

--66

Partial copyLeading EdgeMargin

Enable to make "+" margin in the partial copymode, ("--" margin cannot be made.)

0: NO1: "+" margin can be made in the part copy mode

--67

Toner Full SupplyMode

In the Special Toner Supply mode (SP62), ifthe "clear/stop" key is pressed while the"Emergency Stop" key is pressed, 100%,toner supply is done.

0: NO1: Toner Full Supply Mode

--68

Combine OriginalsMode

Normally the copy process stops at thetrailing edge of paper or original which evercomes first. If this mode is selected, copyprocess continues to the paper trailing edgeeven if the original trailing edge comes first.Using this mode, several originals can becombined on copy sheet.

0: Normal1: Combine Originals Mode

A163 4-24 FSM

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No.22)

In mm Mode 0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297 1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600,

500, 400, 300, 245 3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245 5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245 6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257 7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245 8: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245 9: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788,

765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 25710: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 24511: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 24512: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350,

1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550,500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245

13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550,500, 420, 297, 245

14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420,364, 297, 245

15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 24516: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 24517: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 24518: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 24519: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode 0: 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0 1: 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 3: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 4: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 5: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6 6: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0, 9.6 7: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 8: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 9: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0,

12.0, 11.0, 9.610: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0,

42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0, 9.611: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,

34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.612: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,

24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6

FSM 4-25 A163

13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0,22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6

14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6

15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.616: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.617: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,

36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.618: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3,

18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.619: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings (SP # --1)

SP. No. U.S.A.#1 2#2 0#3 1#4 0#5 2#6 0#8 0#9 0#10 0#20 1#21 0#22 0#--2 5#--3 1

A163 4-26 FSM

3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODEThe input check mode allows you to check the current status of electricalcomponents (such as sensors, switches, etc.) from the operation panel.

The output check mode allows you to turn the individual electrical components(such as motors, solenoids, etc.) ON/OFF from the operation panel.

3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE

How to access the output check mode

Press the following keys in sequence.

→ → → →

The second time that the key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3seconds (until the and indicators blink).

How to leave the input/output check mode

Press the following keys in sequence.

→ →

or turn off the main switch.

NOTE: Each of the above procedures must be finished within 20 seconds.

How to select the program number

The program number can be selected by pressing the and keys.

To select an input check mode, press the key.

To select an output check mode, press the key.

The selected number is displayed on the lead edge erase indicator (the two digitindicator beside the mark).

To select the program number quickly, hold down the or key.

FSM 4-27 A163

3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE

The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed on the paperlength indicator ("ON" or "OFF" is displayed.). If a program number not used isselected, "NOT" is displayed.

ProgramNo. Sensor/Switch /Signal

--1 Registration Sensor--2 Exit Sensor--3 Original Registration Sensor--4 Entrance Sensor

--5Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is"ON" when the main motor is normallyrotating.)

--6 Door Switch (Status is "ON" when thedoor is open.)

--7 to --9 Not Used--10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor--11 Roll Feeder Door Switch--12 Right Cutter Switch--13 Left Cutter Switch--14 Paper End Sensor

Rev. 5/95

A163 4-28 FSM

3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE

Press the key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status ofthe component is displayed on the paper length indicator.

To turn off the component, press the key again.

ProgramNo. Electrical Component

0 Main Motor1 Toner Supply Clutch2 Pick off solenoid3 Registration Clutch4 Total Counter5 Pre-transfer Lamp6 Quenching Lamp7 Fusing Lamp8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)

10 Main Charge Corona11 Grid Voltage12 Transfer Charge Corona13 Not Used14 Separation Charge Corona

15 to 19 Not Used20 Bias Voltage for the Image Area21 Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area22 Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage

23Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage forthe Non-image Area + QuenchingLamp

24 to 25 Not Used26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note

28 Roller Feeder Paper Feed Motor

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutterswitches. The number of the movement (0~9999) is displayed on thepaper length indicator.

FSM 4-29 A163

3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODEThe initial setting, when the main switch is turned on, can be changed in thismode. The procedure is as follows:

1. Turn on the main switch while holding the Emergencey stop key down and indicators blink).

2. Input the operation panel setting that the customer requires (paper size,image density, etc.).

3. Turn off the main switch.

The setting, just before the main switch is turned off, is memorized as the poweron initial setting. It appears again when the main switch is turned on.

A163 4-30 FSM

4. JAM CODE LISTWhen a document (original) jam or paper jam occurs, the cause of the jam isdisplayed by using the following jam code.

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE 1. When a document jam or paper jam occurs, press and hold the Clear/Stop

key.

2. Read the jam code.

4.2 JAM CODE TABLE

Code Cause of Jam SP Mode No.PJ01 Initial misfeed at the registration sensor. SP81

(Initial Jams)PJ02 Initial misfeed at the exit sensor.PJ03 Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.PJ04 Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.

PJ05 Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the rollfeeder.

PJ20 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leadingedge.

SP82(Manual Feed andRegistration Jams)PJ21 Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.

PJ22 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.PJ23 Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.PJ30 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. SP83

(Jams at Fusing Unit)PJ31 Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.PJ32 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.

PJ40 Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leadingedge.

SP84(Roll Feeder Jams)

PJ41 Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leadingedge.

PJ42 Paper cutter failure.PJ43 Door open during the roll feeding.

PJ56 Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailingedge.

SP85(Roll Feeder Jams)

PJ57 Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailingedge.

PJ58 Entrance sensor ON during the roll feeding.

PJ59 Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge(in roll feeding).

FSM 4-31 A163

Code Cause of Jam SP Mode No.

PJ90Roll feeder.motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm morethan the maximum paper length.

SP80(Others)

PJ98 Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed2500 mm.

PJ99 Original registration sensor does not turn off after paperis fed 2500 mm.

NOTE: To display total jam number, access SP mode No. 80.

A163 4-32 FSM

5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

No. DESCRIPTION PART NO. REMARKS

1 Digital Multimeter 54209507 BECKMAN RMS3030

2 Deluxe Test LeadAccessory Kit 54209508 BECKMAN DL241

3 Grease -- Mobil Temp.78 54479078 400 g/can

4 Grease-G501 52039501

5 Current Measuring Drum A0239520

6 Test Chart OS-A1(2 sheets/set) A0239504

7 Spring Hook 54199653

8 Setting Powder 54429101

FSM 4-33 A163

6. SERVICE REMARKS6.1 DRUM UNIT6.1.1 Drum

The organic photoconductor drum is comparatively more sensitive to light andammonia gas than a selenium drum.

1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.

2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than aminute.

3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface istouched with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe with a dry cloth or clean with wetcotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.

4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.

5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.

6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easilydamaged.

7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.

8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when inserting or pulling thedrum unit out of the copier to avoid exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight.This will protect the drum from light fatigue.

9. Before removing the drum, place a sheet of paper under the drum to catchany falling toner.

10. Dispose of used drums according to local regulations.

11. Perform the light sensor adjustment when a new drum is installed.

12. Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

13. Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing orreinstalling the drum.

14. When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press toostrongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

A163 4-34 FSM

15. When the drum unit is removed from the copier, do not close the paper pathsection if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open the paperpath section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you close thepaper path section, take care not to injure yourself by opening the paper pathsection. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path section deform thecopier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy image problem.Release both levers together while holding the paper path section to open thepaper path section slowly.

16. The drum unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping thedrum unit when removing and installing it.

6.2 CHARGE CORONA 1. The wire can also be cleaned with a blower brush. If the wire is cleaned with

a dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched. Do not usesand paper or a solvent.

2. Do not touch the corona wire and the grid wires with oily hands. Oil stainsmay cause uneven image density on copies.

3. Make sure that the corona wire is correctly positioned and that there is noforeign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.

4. Clean the grid wires with a dry cloth.

5. When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2 connectors (Cfor the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set properly.

6. Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight slots, are allstraight, and not crossed.

7. Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.

8. Make sure that the wire junction is positioned inside the right endblock.

FSM 4-35 A163

6.3 OPTICS 1. Clean the exposure glass with water or alcohol.

2. Clean the fiber optics array with lens paper or silicone cloth.

3. Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide plate whenreassembling.

4. Make sure that the direction of the aperture of the exposure lamp is towardsthe fiber optics array side (rear side) when reassembling.

5. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side of the fiber opticsarray by touching the optics side plate.

6.4 DEVELOPMENT 1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.

2. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.

3. Initial conditioning (SP#36) is necessary when the developer is replaced.

4. Dispose of used developer according to local regulations.

5. Do not loosen the painted screws which determine the development doctorblade height and do not push the doctor blade too hard, otherwise the doctorgap may change.

6. Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.

7. When the development unit is removed from the copier, do not close thepaper path section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides openthe paper path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If youclose the paper path section, be careful not to injure yourself when openingthe paper path section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper pathsection deform the copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copyimage problem. Release both levers together while holding the paper pathsection to open the paper path section slowly.

8. The development unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by droppingthe development unit when removing and installing it.

9. During the developer initialization, do not turn off the main switch, or do notopen the original feed unit or the paper path section, or do not unplug thecopier power cord. If these conditions happen, do the developer initializationagain, the toner density sensor cannot be adjusted.

A163 4-36 FSM

6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 1. Clean the corona wires with a blower brush. If the wires are cleaned with a

dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched.

2. When adjusting the corona current, always use the drum current measuring drum.

3. Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it downwhen reinstalling.

4. Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may causeuneven charge on the drum.

5. Do not expand and bend the corona wires.

6. Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,... etc.) as thiswill damage the corona wire.

7. Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charge onthe drum.

6.6 CLEANING UNIT 1. Be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade.

2. Dispose of used toner according to local regulations.

3. Do not press the cleaning blade too hard. Otherwise, the drum unit maydeform.

4. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure severaltimes manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade gently along its entirelength ensure that the cleaning blade contacts the drum. Otherwise, cleaningfailure may occur.

5. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the edge of thecleaning blade.

6. Empty the toner collection bottle every service call and clear the memorycounter SP#52 for used toner overflow detection by SP#53. Do not performSP#53 without emptying the toner collection bottle.If "FULL" is indicated in the copy counter, SP#52 can also be reset to 0 bypressing the Clear Modes/Standby key after opening and closing the paperpath section. Instruct customers to deal with the toner collection bottle if the"FULL" condition is indicated.

FSM 4-37 A163

6.7 FUSING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers and tensionsprings.

2. Do not touch the fusing lamp with bare hands.

3. Make sure that the fusing lamp does not touch the hot roller.

4. Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor and pressure rollerthermistor when removing and reinstalling hot roller or the pressureroller.

5. The fusing unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping thefusing unit when removing and installing it.

6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressureroller should be replaced.

1. Access Sp mode with the steps below.In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key,Clear/Stop key, press and hold the Clear/Stop key again for longer than3 seconds.

2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below. a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicators lights.

If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, press Function Select keyuntil it lights.

b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to selectLamp Off Mode.)

c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.

d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp OffMode.)

e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.

3. To prevent a paper misfeed create a lead edge margin with the stepsbelow.

a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.

b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value)is indicated.

4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paperor thicker plain paper with vertical grain direction.

Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting tothe mode which is one step lower than the proper setting forthe particular kind of paper. For example, if the propersetting is Mode 3, select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSBNo. FW740-010 for more information regarding the propersettings for particular types of paper and the adjustmentprocedure for non-listed papers.

⇒

Rev. 9/27/96

A163 4-38 FSM

5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately5 times.

6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond withthe scraped parts of the pressure roller. If white lines and/or bandsappear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a new one.

7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "LampOff Mode", "Lead Margin" and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to theoriginal settings.

6.8 ORIGINAL FEED

1. Do not touch the original feed rollers, original registration rollers, platenroller and press rollers with bare hands.

2. Clean the white plate with water or alcohol.

6.9 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the manual feed rollers and registration rollers with barehands.

2. A worn out registration roller causes paper to crease. It should bereplaced.

6.10 ROLL FEEDER

1. The copier is not attached to the table and roll feeder is attached to thetable and copier. Do not lift the copier from the table, otherwise rollfeeder unit is deformed.

2. When the copier and roll feeder is moved, loosen the screws for anglebracket and spacer and retighten them for absorb floor distortion.

6.11 OTHERS

1. When replacing the main board, if the RAM on the old main board is stillusable, remove and place it on the new main board. Then, install the newmain board in the copier.

2. After installing the new main board with a new RAM, clear the RAMmemory. (Do not clear RAM memory if you have placed the old RAM onthe new main board.)

3. Take care not to damage the mylars on the rear feed table duringservicing.

4. When replacing a sensor, do not overtighten the screws. This maydamage the sensor.

Rev. 9/27/96

Ser

vice

Tab

les

FSM 4-39 A163

REPLACEMENT ANDADJUSTMENT

1. EXTERIOR COVERS

1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL1.1.1 Left Upper Cover

1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws).

1.1.2 Left Lower Cover

1. Open the paper path section [B].

2. Remove the left lower cover [C] (2 screws).

1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL1.2.1 Right Upper Cover

1. Remove the right upper cover [D] (2 screws).

1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers

1. Open the paper path section.

2. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws), right lower middle cover [F], andtoner collection bottle [G].

3. Remove the right lower rear cover [H] (1 screw).

1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL1.3.1 Rear Cover

1. Remove the rear cover [I] (2 screws).NOTE: When re-installing the rear cover, push in the rear cover hooking

portion [J] over the copier bottom plate as shown.

[C]

[A] [B][J]

[H]

[G][F]

[E][D]

[I]

FSM 5-1 A163

2. OPTICS

2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL 1. Remove the left and right upper covers.

2. Remove the copy tray [A].

3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feedunit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (2 connectors).

4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.

5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn andremove.

[B]

[D][A][C]

[G]

[E]

[F]

A163 5-2 FSM

2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the original feed unit.

2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (2 screws).

3. Remove the rear original guide plate [B] (2 screws).

4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting upthe left side as shown.NOTE: Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide

plate when reassembling.

2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL 1. Remove the exposure glass.

2. Remove the front original guide plate [D] (2 screws).NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the

exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp. 3. Turn the exposure lamp [E] 1/4 of a turn and remove.

NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [F] of the exposure lampis towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

[F]

[C]

[C]

[A][D]

[B][E]

FSM 5-3 A163

2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 3 of the exposure lamp removal.

2. Remove the original registration sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).

3. Lift up the fiber optics array [B] and remove it from the left side by sliding itout to the right side as shown.NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [C] of

the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [D].

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

A163 5-4 FSM

2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the exposure lamp.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

3. Perform light sensor adjustment. See page 5-39

[A]

Rev. 5/95

FSM 5-5 A163

3. DEVELOPMENT3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the left and right upper cover.

2. Open the paper path section and original feed unit.

3. Remove the toner supply cover [A].

4. Remove the manual entrance feed cover [B] (2 pins).

5. Remove the paper feed driven unit [C] (2 screws and 1 connector).

[B]

[A]

[C]

A163 5-6 FSM

6. Remove the 4 shoulder screws [A] and 2 screws [B] fixing the developmentunit.

7. Disconnect the 14p connector [C] and remove it out of the cutout [D].

8. Remove the development unit [E].

CAUTION: Do not loosen the painted screws [F] which determine thedevelopment doctor blade height and do not push the doctorblade [G] too strongly, otherwise the doctor gap may change.

[F] [F]

[G]

[E]

[B]

[A]

[A]

[A][B]

[A]

[D][C]

FSM 5-7 A163

3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL

NOTE: Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.

1. Remove the development unit and place it on a large sheet of paper [A] asshown.

2. Remove the toner supply unit casing [B] (2 pins) and development filter [C]and bracket [C] and clean them.

3. Stand up the development unit as shown (the drive section of the unit is theupper side).

4. Turn the paddle roller knob [D] clockwise. The developer will fall out onto thepaper.

5. Repeat step 4 until all of the developer has been dumped out.

6. Clean the development unit prior to reassembling. Especially, clean the rightend of the unit.

[C][B]

[A]

[D]

A163 5-8 FSM

3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the development unit.

2. Disconnect the harness connector [A] and take the harness from the 2clamps [B].

3. Remove the 2 screws [C] of the toner density sensor holder.

4. Pull out the harness from the toner density sensor side until the relayconnector [D] appears.

5. Replace the toner density sensor [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).

[C]

[E]

[A]

[D]

[B]

FSM 5-9 A163

3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the paper feed driven unit (follow the steps from 1 to 5 of thedevelopment unit removal).

2. Remove the PTL assembly [A] (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 4 clamps [B]).

[B]

[A]

A163 5-10 FSM

3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack isreplaced.

Preparation:

1. Turn off the main switch, and remove the rear cover.

2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, andconnect the voltage terminal to TP1 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.

3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.

4. Turn on the main switch.

3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --180 ± 10 V.

1. Access SP mode and select No. --20.

2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.

3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press

the key and then change the voltage using and

keys.

4. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key.

FSM 5-11 A163

3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --200 ± 10V


2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.



keys.

4. If the voltage is within the standard, press the key.

A163 5-12 FSM

4. DRUM UNIT4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL


2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.

3. Remove the timing belt [B] and disconnect the harness connector [C].

4. Remove the drum unit [D].

5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor. NOTE: (1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on

the pins [F] of the copier side plates.

(2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

[A]

[A]

[F]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[D]

FSM 5-13 A163

4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the drum unit.

2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).

3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when

removing or reinstalling the drum. 4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.

5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it counter clockwise as shown.

6. Remove the drum flange [E].

7. Replace the drum with new one.NOTE: when reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the

projection of the gear is on the drum side.

Rev. 5/95

[C]

[E] [D]

[B]

[B]

[A]

[F]

A163 5-14 FSM

4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT


2. Remove the charge corona unit (Pg 5-16)

3 Remove the quenching lamp unit [A].

4. Remove the pressure spring [B] and bushing [C].

5. Slide the cleaning blade [D] to the left side and remove it from the right side.NOTE: 1. Do not press the cleaning blade too strongly. Otherwise, the drum

unit may deform. 2. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure

[E] several times manually, and then hold down the cleaning bladegently along its entire length to ensure that the cleaning bladecontacts the drum. Even if the drum is installed already, this action[F] can be taken through the rear side from where the rear feed tableassembly is removed (follow steps 1 to 3 of the ozone filterreplacement).

3. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on theedge of the cleaning blade.

Rev. 5/95

[E

[F]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

FSM 5-15 A163

4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL


2. Remove the ground springs [A].

3. Remove the charge corona unit [B] (2 connectors).NOTE: When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2

connectors (C for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are setproperly.

[A]

[A]

[B]

A163 5-16 FSM

4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the charge corona unit.

2. Remove the 4 grid wires [A] (4 springs).

3. Remove the endblock covers [B].

4. Replace the corona wire [C] (1 spring).NOTE: (1) Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight

slots [D], are all straight, and not crossed.

(2) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands maycause uneven charge on the drum.

(3) Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.

(4) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,...etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.

(5) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will causeuneven charge on the drum.

(6) Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the rightendblock.

[A]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[D]

FSM 5-17 A163

4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the drum unit and place it as shown.

2. Remove the pressure spring [A] and pick-off pawl unit [B] (2 screws and 1connector).NOTE: When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press

too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

[A]

[B]

A163 5-18 FSM

4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --940 ± 10V.

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack isreplaced.

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the rear cover.

2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, andconnect the voltage terminal to TP2 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.

3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.

4. Turn on the main switch.


6. Press the key to turn on the grid voltage.



keys.


Rev. 2/7/96

⇒

FSM 5-19 A163

4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENTNOTE: a) The drum currents vary with environmental conditions such as

humidity and atmospheric pressure. Generally it is not necessary toadjust the drum currents because they have already been adjustedfor a wide range of environments at the factory.

b) Drum current adjustment is necessary whenever the power packsare replaced: adjustment may also be necessary to correct problemswith paper separation, incomplete toner transfer, or image density.

c) Make sure that the main switch is turned off when you change therange on the digital multimeter. If it is not, the multimeter may bedamaged.

d) There are variable resistors to change the charge currents, but theyshould not be changed. The drum currents should be adjusted bychanging SP mode setting.

Preporation

1. Remove the developer unit.


3. Remove the OPC drum from the drum unit, and install the currentmeasurement drum [A] instead of the OPC drum.

[A]

A163 5-20 FSM

4. Install the drum unit [B] on the machine.

CAUTION: Be careful not to turn on the main motor. If the main motoraccidentally turns on, some parts around the drum may bedamaged.

[B]

FSM 5-21 A163

4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc--1000 ± 20 µA

WARNING: Make sure that the machine is unplugged before connectingthe multimeter on the charge/bias/grid power pack. Pay extreme attention when connecting the multimeter. Thepotential of the charge corona terminal becomes --5kV.

1. Connect all the terminals of the current measurement drum to the machineground.

2. Disconnect the charge corona terminal of the charge/bias/grid power pack.

3. Connect the multimeter as shown in the illustration.

4. Set the multimeter range at dc 2 mA.

5. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.


7. Press the key to turn on the charge corona.



keys so that the charge current is dc --1000 ± 20 µA.


A163 5-22 FSM

4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --100 ± 5 µA (Leading edge to 20 mm from the trailing edge) dc --150 ± 5 µA (20 mm trailing edge)

1 Connect the multimeter as shown above.

2. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 µA.



5. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona.

6. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the

voltage using and keys so that the transfer current is dc--100 ± 5 µA.


8. Select SP mode No. --13.

9. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona.

10. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the

voltage using and keys so that the transfer current is dc--150 ± 5 µA.


FSM 5-23 A163

4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: ac 250 ± 10 µA (Normal Paper) ac 350 ± 10 µA (Film and leading edge of translucent paper) dc --20 ± 2.5 µA

1. Connect the multimeter as shown above.

2. Set the multimeter range at ac 2 mA.



5. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

6. Check the multimeter. Press the key and then change the current

using and keys so that the ac separation current is ac 250± 10 µA.


8. Select SP mode No. --15



using and keys so that the ac separation current is ac 350± 10 µA.


A163 5-24 FSM

12. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 µA.




using and keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20± 2.5 µA.





using and keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20± 2.5 µA.


Rev. 5/95

FSM 5-25 A163

5. FUSING5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the copier rear cover.

2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.

3. Disconnect the connector [C] and flex the hinge arms [D] of the exit coverslightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.

4. Turn the exit unit 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it bypulling out.NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [F] between the two

pulleys [G] and raise the left hinge [H] using tape [I].

[H] [I]

[F]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[G][B]

[A]

[B]

[E]

[H]

A163 5-26 FSM

5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.

7. Remove the 2 screws [C].

8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], pull out the fusingunit.NOTE: While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], set the

fusing unit on the guides [E] and align the cuts [F] to the side plates[G] at both ends when reinstalling the fusing unit.

[C]

[D]

[E][F]

[G]

[C]

[B]

[A]

FSM 5-27 A163

5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor when removing andreinstalling the hot roller.

1. Remove the fusing unit.

2. Remove the pressure springs [A].

3. Remove the fusing lamp brackets [B] and cushions [C] (1 screw each).

4. Remove the fusing lamp [D] from the left side as shown (1 connector [E], rearview).

5. Remove the 2 C-rings [G], 1 gear [H], 2 bushings [I], and 2 bearings [J]).

6. Slide the hot roller [K] to the right side and remove it from the left side.

Rev. 5/95

[C]

[B] [F]

[B]

[C]

[E][D]

[K]

[G]

[H][I][J][A]

[A]

[J][G]

[I]

A163 5-28 FSM

5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT

CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the hot roller or pressure roller while they are hot. 2) Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor [A] and pressure roller thermistor [B] when removing and reinstalling the pressure roller.

1. Remove the hot roller.

2. Push the projection [C] of the fusing entrance guide stopper and remove thefusing entrance guide [D].

3. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [E] (4 screws).

4. Lift up the pressure roller (access the pressure roller from the cut [F] of theframe), slide out the pressure roller shaft [G] to the left, then remove thepressure roller [H].

5. Replace the pressure roller (2 stoppers [I] and 1 shaft [J]).NOTE: When reinstalling pressure roller, set the right pressure roller stopper

and push the pressure roller shaft to the right from the left, and setthe left pressure roller stopper [ ].

Rev. 5/95

[H] [D]

[F]

[G]

[A][B][E]

[C]

[I]

[J][I]

FSM 5-29 A163

5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT 1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal.

2. Remove the pressure roller thermistor [A] (1 screw).

5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT 1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal.

2. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [B] (4 screws).

5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT 1. Follow step 1 to 4 of the fusing unit removal.

2. Remove the hot roller stripper unit [C] (2 screws).

[C]

[A]

[B]

A163 5-30 FSM

5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the fusing unit.

2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the fusing stay.

3. Disconnect the thermofuse connector [B] from the fusing lamp harness [C].

4. Remove the hot roller thermistor [D] (1 screw and 1 spring, 7 clamps [E]).

5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT 1. Follow step 1 to 3 of the hot roller thermistor replacement.

2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [F] (1 screw and 4 clamps [G]).

[A]

[E]

[E] [D]

[E]

[G]

[A][G][F]

[B]

[C]

FSM 5-31 A163

5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

Caution: When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenlystart to drive the fusing section. Keep your hands away fromany mechanical and electrical components during this period.

This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.

Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (155°C), Mode 2 (160°C), Mode 3 (165°C), Mode 4(170°C), Mode 5 (180°C), Mode 6 (190°C), Mode 7 (196°C)



3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by theharness.

4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].

5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, andwait for longer than 10 minutes.

6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at themiddle of the hot roller.

7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.

9. Reassemble the machine.

[A]

[B]

A163 5-32 FSM

6. T & S CORONA UNIT6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

1. Open the paper path section [A] and take out the T & S corona unit [B] (2connectors [C]).NOTE: 1) Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it

down when reinstalling.2) Remove the connector cover [D] (1screw) for connecting the 2

connectors.

[B]

[C]

[A]

[C]

[D]

FSM 5-33 A163

6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIREREPLACEMENT

NOTE: (1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands maycause uneven charging of the drum.

(2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.

(3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.

(4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will causeuneven charging of the drum.

6.2.1 Preparation

1. Remove the T & S corona unit.

2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

[B]

[B]

[C]

[I]

[A]

[F]

[E]

[D]

[G]

[H]

[H]

A163 5-34 FSM

6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].

2. Hook the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right endblock.NOTE: Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right

endblock. 3. Hook the other side of the separation corona wire on the spring hook [F]

(special tool: 54199653). While pushing the spring [G] in the direction of thearrow, hook the separation corona wire on the spring.

4. Set the wire on the slots [H].

6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [I].

2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

FSM 5-35 A163

7. OTHERS7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Take care not to damage the mylars [A] on the rear feed table.

1. Open the fusing exit cover [B] and exit unit [C].

2. Remove the copy tray [D].

3. Remove the rear feed table assembly [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).

4. Unhook the blower duct [F] and remove.

5. Unhook the fan support plate [G] and remove.

6. Replace the ozone filter [H].NOTE: When reinstalling the rear feed table assembly, fix the 2 screws [I]

while pushing the assembly.

[H]

[G]

[F]

[A]

[E]

[D][I]

[I]

[C]

[B]

A163 5-36 FSM

7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rear cover of the machine (2 screws).

2. Remove the T&S corona unit.

3. Install the anticondensation heater [A] (3 screws).

4. Put the harness of the heater into the cutout [B] of the frame.

5. Connect the connector of the heater [C] with the one beside the ac driveboard.

[C]

[A]

[B][C]

FSM 5-37 A163

8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT-- General Information --

Image density is affected by the following factors:

(1) Light Intensity (2) Bias Voltage (3) Toner Density (4) Grid Voltage (5) Charge Corona Current

The items listed above must be kept in balance to maintain correct image density.

In the field, image density should be adjusted first by changing the lightintensity. (Adjust the light sensor voltage.) If results are unsatisfactory, thebias voltage can be changed. Also, if requested by the customer, theoverall image density can be changed by changing the toner density.Normally, this should be kept at the normal position (factory setting).

The grid voltage and charge corona current are carefully adjusted at the factory.Any adjustment out of the adjustment standards will result in over toning, tonerscattering, dirty background, or light image density problems. The grid voltageand charge corona current adjustment should be done only when replacing theCharge/Bias/Grid power pack, or to correct certain problems with image densityafter checking all other possible causes.

NOTE: Adjusting grid voltage will not affect toner supply amount, but willaffect the amount of charge reaching the drum. Exposing the thedrum to light will not disipate all residual voltage resulting inovertoning and background.

Rev. 5/95

A163 5-38 FSM

8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT

When:

1. Every Call

2. When replacing the following part

• Exposure lamp • Light sensor

• Drum • RAM on the main board

Purpose: To maintain the correct light intensity.

AdjustmentStandard:

Level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale on the OS-A1 chartshould be slightly visible when the 4th manual image densitylevel is selected.

Perform: Change SP #-6 setting.

How: Change the light sensor voltage.


2. Clean the following parts:

Item No. Section Method

(1) Optics (Exposure glass, fiber optics array)

Damp cotton and dry softcloth

(2) Corona wires (charge, transfer andseparation) and casing.

Dry cloth

(3) PTL Dry cloth or blower brush

3. Remove the middle right cover.

4. Make several copies at manual image density level 4 with OS-A1 chart.

5. Confirm that level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale is slightly visible on thecopy. If the copy image density is not correct, proceed with the following step.

6. Change SP #-6 setting in the SP mode.If the image density is too dark: Increase SP #-6 setting.If the image density is too light: Decrease SP #-6 setting.

7. Confirm that image density is within the adjustment standard.

FSM 5-39 A163

8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT

When:

1. The image is blurred even though the image density in black solid areas is acceptable.

2. Dirty background, where the problem is not caused by excess toner and cannot be solved by adjusting the light sensor voltage.

Purpose: To improve the copy image.

Perform: SP #-20

How: Change the development bias voltage for image densitycontrol by SP #-20.

SP #-20 3 Standard 0 ← 3 → 8 Darker Lighter

1. Make a copy after adjusting the light intensity.

2. If the image is blurred: Decrease bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.

If the background is dirty:Increase bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.

A163 5-40 FSM

8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

When: Customer wants to change the overall image density of thecopies.

Purpose: To change toner concentration inside development unit.

Perform: SP #-22

How: Change the toner density setting by SP #-22

NOTE: The toner density can also be adjusted using SP #-30 (toner densitysensor voltage setting). To return SP #-30 to the initial value, take memowhen the value is changed.

8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Registration is not within the adjustment standard.

Purpose: To maintain proper registration.

AdjustmentStandard:

0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12")

Perform: SP #-5

How: Change the registration roller start timing by SP #-5.

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check theregistration.

2. Adjust the registration using SP #-5 if the registration is not within theadjustment standard.

FSM 5-41 A163

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY

Is the used paper moist or extremely dry?

No Yes

Replace the paper.

Is the toner sensor voltage within the no toner supply level (level 0) ?(Refer to Page 2-16.)

Yes No

Is there sufficient toner in the cartridge?

Yes No

Replace the toner cartridge.

Is the toner supply clutch energized?

Yes No

Check the main board and the toner supply clutch.

Does the toner sensor voltage decrease in the special toner supply mode (SP#62)?

Yes No

Check the toner supply mechanism.

The amount of toner used exceeds the toner supply amount.

⇒Supply toner until the toner sensor voltage reaches the target value.

Is the solid black copy dark enough? (Make a solid black copy using SP#--51.)

Yes No

Does the image density recover (without dirty background) after forcing supply of tonerusing SP#62?

Yes No

Check the charge corona, transfer corona and development bias.

Check the toner sensor and main board.

Check the light sensor, FL regulator and main board.

FSM 6-1 A163

1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE

Make a solid black copy using SP#--51. Is the image density even?

Yes No

Is the developer level in the development unit?

Yes No

Check and correct the machine level.Clean the charge corona wire, grid wire, and transfer corona wire. Check if they are correctly seton the slots of the end blocks.

Clean the optics. If the problem is not fixed, replace the exposure lamp.

A163 6-2 FSM

1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND

Clean the optics and check the copy image.

No good

Change the light sensor setting to a lighter position using SP#--6.

No good

Is the bias voltage correct?

Yes No

Adjust the bias voltage.

Is the toner sensor voltage much lower than the threshold between level 0 and 1?(Check using SP#--32 referring to Page 2-16.)

No Yes

Check the main board and toner supply clutch.

Is the image density of solid areas high?

No Yes

Check the toner sensor.

Make several blank copies. Is the background still dirty?

Yes No

Check the cleaning blade.

Are the grid voltage and the charge corona current correct?

Yes No

Adjust the grid voltage and/or the charge corona current.

Replace the drum.

FSM 6-3 A163

1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND

Vertical line or band?

Yes No

Does the black line appear at 251 mm intervals?

No Yes

Clean or replace the drum.

If a black band appears 250 mm from the leading edge, turn the main switch off and on . Ifthe problem is not fixed, check the T& S corona leakage. *NOTE

Check the part of the following items that corresponds to the position of the vertical line or band.

• Charge corona wire

• Grid wires

• Light path (Exposure lamp, fiber optics array, exposure glass)

• Cleaning blade

• Development unit

• Drum

NOTE: If the separation corona leakage is detected, the separation corona willbe turned off. This condition will not be reset until the main switch isturned off and on. If the separation corona does not turn on, a blackband appears 250 mm from the paper leading edge.

A163 6-4 FSM

1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY

Is the used paper moist?

No Yes

Replace the paper.

Are the terminals of the charge corona unit and the T& S corona unit connected properly?

Yes No

Set the terminals properly.

Is the charge corona wire or the T & S corona wire broken?

No Yes

Replace the broken part.

Are the charge corona and transfer corona applied?

Yes No

Check the main board, charge/bias/grid power pack, and T & S power pack.

Does leakage occur in the T & S endblocks?

No Yes

Replace the defective parts.

Are the development drive gears broken?

No Yes

Replace the broken gears.

Check the drum drive mechanism.

FSM 6-5 A163

1.6 PAPER CREASING

Is the used paper moist?

No Yes

Change the paper.

Is the paper feed direction the same as the paper fiber direction?

No Yes

Change the paper transport direction, if possible. (NOTE 1.)

Decrease the fusing temperature using SP mode #1 to #3. (NOTE 2.)

NOTE: 1. If there is rib shape creasing, the paper feed direction should be the same as the paper fiber direction.2. After decreasing the fusing temperature, check if the image is completely fused on the paper.

A163 6-6 FSM

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION

When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator and servicecall codes are displayed.When the service call conditions E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and E8 conditions occur,for safety reason they cannot be cleared by turning the main switch off and on.Accessing SP38 and changing the date from "1" to "0" must be done to clearthese service call conditions.

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal

-Definition-

The light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.

<Points to check>

Exposure lamp

Light sensor

FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -4)

Main board (CN106-A3, and CN104-B1, -B2, -A29 -A30)

2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 100 C within4 minutes and 30 seconds after the main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>

Fusing thermofuse

Hot roller thermistor

AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4)

Main board (CN106-A2, A4, B12, B14, B15)

FSM 6-7 A163

2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 50°C within3 minutes after the main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>


AC drive board ( T202-2, RA201-T4)

Fusing thermofuse

Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

-Definition-

The resistance of the the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 KΩ.

<Point to check>



2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

-Definition-

The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 MΩ.

<Point to check>

Pressure roller thermistor


A163 6-8 FSM

2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

-Definition-

The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 KΩ.

<Point to check>

Pressure roller thermistor


2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor becomes higher than 250°C

<Point to check>


Fusing thermofuse


Main board (CN106-A2, -B14, -B15)

FSM 6-9 A163

2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

-Definition-

The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the targetready temperature within 12 minutes after main switch is turned on.

<Point to check>


Fusing lamp

Fusing thermofuse



AC harness

2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

-Definition-

The toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.NOTE: This condition is not detected until 251 copies since initializing

developer.<Point to check>

Toner density sensor

Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area

Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

A163 6-10 FSM

2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

-Definition-

The main board does not receive a signal from the main motor for 2 secondswhile the main motor is on.

<Point to check>

Main motor

Mechanical interference of the main motor drive

Main board (CN106-A12, -A13)

2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error

-Definition-

The toner density sensor voltage cannot be adjusted to its standard value (4.1±0.1 volts) during the new developer initialization.NOTE: If clearing the SC condition, the previous data of SP#-30 is still used

until its next initialization.<Point to check>

Toner density sensor

Developer

Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area

Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

FSM 6-11 A163

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Europe versionFuseNo. Specification Symptom

FU1 250V 4A No power.

FU2 250V 6.3A No indication. Beeper sounds.

FU3 250V 6.3A E=10 is indicated.

FU4 250V 6.3A Not used.

USA versionFuseNo. Specification Symptom

FU1 125V 8A No power.

FU2 250V 5A No indication. Beeper sounds.

FU3 250V 5A E=10 is indicated.

FU4 250V 5A Not used.

FU5 125V 1A Counter No symptoms

Rev. 5/95

A163 6-12 FSM

ROLL FEEDER

1. SPECIFICATIONS

Roll Paper Size: Width: 210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"Length: 150 metersDiameter: Less than φ170 mm

Cut Size: --Preset Cut: 1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm48", 36", 24", 18", 12"46", 34", 22", 17", 11"Up to 10 extra preset cut length canbe specified by SP23 ~ 32.

--Selected Length Cut: 245 mm to 2000 mm (1 mm per step)9.6" to 80" (0.1" per step)

Cutting Time: Within 0.80 second

Paper Transport Velocity: 50 mm/s

Repeat Quantity: 1 to 99

Control: Microprocessor

Power Source: +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier

Power Consumption: Maximum 110 W

Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,080 mm x 475 mm x 295 mm42.71" x 18.70" x 11.61"

Weight: 29 kg, 63.8 lb

FSM 7-1 A163

2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVELAYOUT

1. Paper Feed Motor 5. Paper Feed Rollers

2. Idle Pulley 6. Paper Roll Spool

3. Timing Belt 7. Paper Roll

4. Cutter Motor 8. Cutter Unit

54

32

1

7 6

8

5

6

7

A163 7-2 FSM

3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side ofthe Point to Point (Water proof paper).

Name Function Index No.MotorsPaper Feed Drives all mechanical components except the cutter unit

(DC Stepper Motor).32

Cutter Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). 39

SwitchesDoor Indicates "Door Open" on the operation panel and

disables the key operation.38

Left Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the left homeposition.

40

Right Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the right homeposition.

33

SensorsPaper End Detects when the roll paper runs out. 35Leading Edge Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading edge of the

paper to start the paper length pulse count.42

Humidity Detects humidity and turns on the RF antihumidity heaterswhile copying is not being done (if the humidity is higherthan 45%).

34

Printed Circuit BoardRF Control Controls all roll cutter unit functions in accordance with

copier CPU.37

OthersUpper RFAntihumidity Heater

Removes humidity from the roll paper 41

Lower RFAntihumidity Heater

Removes humidity from the roll paper 36

Rev. 5/95

FSM 7-3 A163

A163 7-4 FSM

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION

4.1 BASIC OPERATION

The paper feed rollers [A], which are turned by the paper feed motor, feed paperfrom the paper roll [B] through the cutter unit [C] to the paper leading edgesensor [D] according to the signal from the copier. When the paper feed motorstarts, the copier CPU starts measuring the length of the paper. (The paperlength is measured by counting the number of steps as the paper feed motor[stepper motor] turns.)

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

FSM 7-5 A163

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper isdirected to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotatingafter the registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the copy paper. Thecopy paper is fed to the registration roller and stops to wait for the original. At theappropriate timing after the original registration sensor is activated by the original,the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to rotate. The copy paperstarts to be fed again. Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speedof the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edgeof the copy paper. When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motorstops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motorhas stopped, the registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. Thepaper is cut during the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled straight.This allows for a neat cut.

When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 309 mm, the roll cutter unitcuts the paper after the first rotation of the roll paper feed roller [D], as the paperreaches the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again.After the registration roller stops rotating, the roll paper feed motor continues torotate and a paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. When theselected cut length is between 309 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts thepaper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. The paper buckleforms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because the paper feedroller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The registration rollerbrake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registrationrollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

Rev. 5/95

A163 7-6 FSM

4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM

The gear [A] from the paper feed motor disengages from the cutter unit gears [B]when the roll cutter unit is unlocked from the lower position and lifted up. At thistime, the cutter unit is locked at the upper position by the lock lever [C], and thewheel [D] on the right side can be rotated manually to position the leading edgeof the roll paper.

[B]

[A]

[C][D]

FSM 7-7 A163

4.3 CUTTER OPERATION

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixedblade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paperin both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutterunit. The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotarycutting blade knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

[C]

[B] [C] [A]

A163 7-8 FSM

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 TEST POINTS

Function TP No.

GND TP903

VA (24 V) TP901

VC (5 V) TP902

5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION

Component Unit Symptom

F901 (250V/1.0A) RF Main board The AC line for theR/F antihumidityheaters is cut. Theheaters are notturned on.

FSM 7-9 A163

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Roll Feeder (A571)

CAUTION: Unplug the copier power cord before starting the followingprocedure.

Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:

Harness Cover ............................................................................ 2 pcs

Angle Bracket .............................................................................. 1 pc

Spacer ......................................................................................... 1 pc

Small Cap..................................................................................... 1 pc

Screws - M4x8 ............................................................................ 8 pcs

Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8............................................. 2 pcs

NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714) isrequired.

A163 7-10 FSM

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder isbeing installed on the table and the copier.NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent

the left and right covers from being damaged.

2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].

3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).

4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] tothe down position.

[A]

[C]

[C] [C]

[D]

[H]

[E][G]

[H]

[F][B]

FSM 7-11 A163

5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A](2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).

6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.

7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

[A]

[E]

[B][C]

[D]

[F]

[G]

A163 7-12 FSM

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing thebracket [A].

8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1screw), bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and themanual feed table [D].

[C]

[D] [B]

[A]

[C]

FSM 7-13 A163

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on bothsides into the mounting rail [B]).NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.

10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).

11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

[A]

[B]

[D][E]

[F]

A163 7-14 FSM

NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until thespring washers [A] are flattened.

12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside ofthe table.

13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through theholes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F])

14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board 2 connectors [G]and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer).

15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac driveboard connector.

16. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).

17. Reinstall Manual Feed Table

18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder rightcover.

[D]

[C]

[H]

[J]

[G][I]

[A]

[F][E]

[B]

[A]

FSM 7-15 A163


19. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear Modes key [A] + key [B]- key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]

20. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds.The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).

21. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F].

22. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that isattached to the right side plate.

23. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

24. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.

25. Check the roll feeder operation.

[B]

[A]

[D][F][E]

[C]

300 PRG.No.

1100 PRG.No.

NORMAL XX 42 XX 45HIGH (VELLUM) XX 43 XX 46LOW (FILM) XX 44 XX 47

LengthTemperature

A163 7-16 FSM

7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

7.1.1 Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 screws).NOTE: If the screw holes for the front cover become worn by the screws,

extra holes are provided next to the original screw holes.

7.1.2 Left and Right CoverNOTE: Be careful not to drop and damage the lower front cover [B].

1. Remove the left and right covers [C and D] (3 screws each).NOTE: When reattaching the left and/or right covers, unlock and lift the

cutter unit for easier assembly.

[A]

[C]

[C][B]

FSM 7-17 A163

7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the roll feeder left and right covers.

2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the cutter unit.

3. Take out the cutter unit [B] (1 connector [C]).NOTE: When reinstalling the cutter unit, attach the cutter unit cover [D] with

the cutter unit.

[C] [D]

[A]

[A]

[B]

A163 7-18 FSM

7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the cutter unit.

2. Unlock and lift the paper feed roller unit [A] using the release lever [B].

3. Remove the release lock lever [B] (2 screws).

4. Remove the feed roller guide plate [C] (6 screws).

5. Replace the paper feed roller [D] (2 allen screws [E], 1 gear [F], 1 snap ring[G], 2 bushings [H], and 1 retaining ring [I]).

[A]

[B]

[C]

[I]

[H]

[D]

[H] [G] [E] [F]

[E]

FSM 7-19 A163

7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSIONADJUSTMENT

If the timing belt tension for the paper feed motor is not correct, the paper cutlength varies for each copy paper. Readjust the timing belt tension for the paperfeed if this occurs.

1. Remove the small cap [A] (2 screws).

2. Loosen the screw [B] and re-tighten it.

[A]

[B]

A163 7-20 FSM

7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed tocorrect cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factorywithout the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier onwhich it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length asfollows:NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying

because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its lengthtemporarily.

7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm)

NOTE: There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperaturemode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.[Normal (SP#42, 45), High (SP#43, 46), Low (SP#44, 47)].

1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in thepreset cut mode.

2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample andpreset cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.

3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length iswithin the adjustment standards.Example: 1. Current SP data #42....0

Copy sample length = 297 -- 4 Set SP mode #42...4.02. Current SP data #42....0 Copy sample length = 297 -- 4 Set SP mode #42...+ 4.0

4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode andcheck their length.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.

Rev. 5/95

FSM 7-21 A163

7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT

1. Mark a line [A] on the exposure glass [B].

2. Make 594 x 1189 mm copies from the roll feeder unit.NOTE: 594 mm wide paper is easier to adjust than 841 mm wide paper.

3. Measure the lengths [C] and [D].

4. Loosen the 2 screws [E] which determine the paper spool height.

5. If C > D, lower the right side of the paper spool. If C < D, do the opposite.

6. Make another copy. Check the lengths [C] and [D].

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 if necessary. NOTE: If the 10 or more copies are made continuously, the nip band width

of the fusing unit may change. For correct adjustment, do thisprocedure at least 10 minutes after a continuous copy run of 10 ormore.

[B] [A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[E]

A163 7-22 FSM

A251/A252Service Manual

The A251/A252 machines are based on the A163 copier.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the basecopier’s service manual. It should always be utilized together with the basecopier’s service manual.

TOC i A251/A252

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-11.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 1-11.2 PAPER PATH............................................................................................ 1-31.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT................................................................... 1-41.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 1-61.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 1-7

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................ 2-12.1 DRUM........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE..............................................................................................................2-12.3 EXPOSURE............................................................................................... 2-2

2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY) ............................................................2-22.4 DEVELOPMENT........................................................................................ 2-4

2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL.....................................................................................2-42.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ...................................................................... 2-5

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER) ......................................................................................2-5

3. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 3-13.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT..........................................................................................................3-13.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................3-23.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL........................................................................................................3-23.1.4 POWER SOURCE ......................................................................................................3-3

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES............................................................... 3-43.2.1 COPIER.......................................................................................................................3-43.2.2 TABLE (A836) ...........................................................................................................3-123.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10).............................................................................................3-143.2.4 ROLLER FEEDER (A571).........................................................................................3-18

4. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 4-14.3 SERVICE TOOLS...................................................................................... 4-1

4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................................4-14.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ................................................................................4-9

4.4 JAM CODE LIST...................................................................................... 4-114.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE....................................................................................................4-11

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS .............................................................................. 4-154.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD..................................................................................................4-15

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 5-15.2 OPTICS ..................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ......................................................5-15.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ..........................................................5-25.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) .....................................................5-25.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL ...................................................................................5-35.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY) .......................................................5-45.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) ..........................................5-5

5.4 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................... 5-65.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL..............................................................................................5-6

A251/A252 ii TOC

5.5 FUSING ..................................................................................................... 5-75.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL...........................................................................................5-7

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT................................................................................ 5-96.5.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT.........................5-9

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 5-115.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................5-11

6. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 6-16.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIION................................................................... 6-1

6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION ABNORMAL ......................6-16.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL (U.S.A. VERSION ONLY) ................6-1

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE .............................................................................. 6-26.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ..............................................................................................6-2

1

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.






7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning toperform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanicaland electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.



OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by acustomer service representative who has completed the training course onthose models.

2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium batterywhich can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only withan identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAMpack. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must behandled in accordance with local regulations.

2

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignitesuddenly when exposed to open flame.



4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not putmore than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

A251/A252 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

A251/A252 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

A251/A252 INSTALLATION

A251/A252 SERVICE TABLES

A251/A252 REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENT

A251/A252 TROUBLESHOOTING

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

2TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 1

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

3TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 4

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

6TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 5

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

8TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 7

A16

3, A

251,

A25

2, A

174

CO

MP

AR

ISO

N C

HA

RT

TH

E F

OLL

OW

ING

LIS

T D

EF

INE

S T

HE

DIF

FE

RE

NC

ES

BE

TW

EE

N T

HE

A16

3, A

251,

A25

2 an

d A

174

WID

E F

OR

MA

T C

OP

IER

S.

A16

3A

251

A25

2A

174

Con

figur

atio

nT

able

Top

Tab

le T

opT

able

Top

Con

sole

Cop

y S

peed

3 cp

m3

cpm

3 cp

m7.

5 cp

mF

irst C

opy

24 s

econ

ds24

sec

onds

30 s

econ

ds18

sec

onds

War

m-u

p T

ime

5 m

inut

es5

min

utes

5 m

inut

es6

min

utes

Mul

tiple

Cop

yN

oN

o1

– 10

cop

ies

1 –

10 c

opie

sP

aper

Fee

dM

anua

l Fee

d, (

roll

feed

optio

nal)

Man

ual F

eed,

(ro

ll fe

edop

tiona

l)M

anua

l Fee

d, (

roll

feed

optio

nal)

Man

ual F

eed,

2 R

oll F

eeds

(3rd

rol

l fee

d op

tiona

l)S

yncr

oniz

ed C

ut M

ode

No

Sem

i-aut

o sy

nchr

o C

utF

ull A

uto

Syn

chro

Cut

Ful

l Aut

o S

ynch

ro C

utF

usin

g La

mp

Ni-c

hrom

e W

ire L

amp

Ni-c

hrom

e W

ire L

amp

Ni-c

hrom

e W

ire L

amp

Hal

ogen

Lam

pS

elf D

iagn

ostic

Cod

es11

cod

es, d

ispl

ayed

inco

py c

ount

er13

cod

es, d

ispl

ayed

inco

py c

ount

er13

cod

es, d

ispl

ayed

in c

opy

coun

ter

18 c

odes

, dis

play

ed in

cop

yco

unte

rM

echa

nica

l Com

pone

nt L

ayou

tS

ame

as A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163,

diff

eren

t in

orig

inal

feed

are

aS

imila

r to

A16

3

Driv

e La

yout

1 m

otor

, 1 fa

n1

mot

or, 1

fan

2 m

otor

s, 1

fan

7 m

otor

s, 2

vac

uum

, 1 fa

nD

rum

Are

aA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Dru

m D

rive

A16

3A

163

A16

3S

imila

r to

A16

3C

harg

eA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Cha

rge

Cor

ona

Circ

uit

A16

3A

163

A16

3S

imila

r to

A16

3A

uto.

Cha

rge

Wire

Cle

anin

gN

oN

oN

oY

esE

xpos

ure

A16

3A

163

A16

3S

imila

r to

A16

3E

xpos

ure

Lam

p14

0 V

, 26

W14

0 V

, 26

W14

0 V

, 26

W12

5 V

, 37

WD

evel

opm

ent

A16

3A

163

A16

3S

imila

r to

A16

3D

evel

opm

ent D

rive

Mai

n M

otor

Mai

n M

otor

Mai

n M

otor

Sep

arat

e D

ev. M

otor

Man

ual I

mag

e D

ensi

ty (

ID)

14 s

teps

14 s

teps

14 s

teps

26 s

teps

Aut

o Im

age

Den

sity

Con

trol

No

No

No

Yes

Ton

er D

ensi

ty C

ontr

olA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Ton

er S

uppl

yA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Tra

nsfe

r an

d S

epar

atio

nA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Cle

anin

g / Q

uenc

hing

A16

3A

163

A16

3S

imila

r to

A16

3F

usin

g an

d P

aper

Exi

tA

163

A16

3A

163

Sim

ilar

to A

163

Fus

ing

Driv

eA

163

A16

3A

163

Sep

arat

e F

usin

g M

otor

Fan

s1

Exh

aust

1 E

xhau

st1

Exh

aust

2 V

acuu

m, 1

Exh

aust

OVERALL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

SM 1-1 A251/A252

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

Configuration: Table top




Copy Size: Same as “Original Size”


First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways): A251 copier30 seconds (A1/D sideways): A252 copier

Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23°C)

Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only (A251 copier), 1 to 10 (A252 copier)

Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1,3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)


Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)




Development: Dual-component dry toner system

Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)



Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by induction sensor





Image Fusing: Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and siliconerubber (lower) rollers

Fusing Lamp: Nichrome wire lamp(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)

Self-diagnostic Codes: 13 codes, displayed in copy counter

SPECIFICATIONS

A251/A252 1-2 SM

Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz ..... 15 A220 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A230 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A240 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A

Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kWWarm-up: 1.2 kWReady: 0.04 to 1.2 kWCopy cycle: 1.4 kW

Dimensions (W x D x H): A251: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"

A252: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm42.1" x 24.6" x 18.9"

Weight: A251: 79 kg, 174.0 lbA252: 80 kg, 176.2 lb


ConfigurationMain frame Optional equipment

Additional equipment

Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) Table (A714-05)Roll cutting rail (A570-06) —A251 copierSide guides (A569-06) —Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) Table (A836-00)Copy tray (A836-10) Table (A836-00)A252 copierSide guide (A569-06) —

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the A252 copier.2) Key counter cannot be installed on these copiers.


• Paper Spool• Drum anti-condensation heater


PAPER PATH

SM 1-3 A251/A252

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.2 PAPER PATH

A: Original Path (A251 copier)

B: Paper from the manual feed

C: Paper from the roller feed

D: Paper exit

E: Original Path from Rear Feeder

F: Original Path (A252 copier): Switching back

A252V500.PCX A252V504.WMF

A

D

B

E

C

C

B

FE

D

- A251 copier - - A252 copier -

A

MECHANICAL COMPONENT

A251/A252 1-4 SM

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

1. 1st Original Feed Roller2. 1st Press Rollers3. Copy Tray4. Exit Rollers5. Fusing Exit Rollers6. Hot Roller7. Pressure Roller8. Gas Spring9. OPC Drum10. T/S Corona Unit11. Main Drive Unit12. Table13. Paper Spool

14. Roll Feeder15. Paper Registration Rollers16. Development Unit17. Toner Cartridge18. Manual Feed Table19. Charge Corona Unit20. 2nd Original Feed Roller21. Original Table22. 2nd Original Press Roller23. Exposure Lamp24. Fiber Optic Array25. Cleaning Blade

A252V502.PCX

20

25 1 2

3

24232221

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

10

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

MECHANICAL COMPONENT

SM 1-5 A251/A252

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

26. Original Guide27. Rear Copy Tray (Option Copy Tray)28. Original Feed Motor29. Original Entrance Roller

30. Original Rear Roller31. Original Entrance Press Roller32. Original Rear Press Roller

A252V505.WMF

27

2630

3228

31

29

DRIVE LAYOUT

A251/A252 1-6 SM

1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Original Feed Roller Pulley2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley3. Development Unit4. Development Unit Relay Gear5. Development Drive Chain6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch7. Drum Drive Relay Gear8. Main Motor9. Fusing Drive Chain10. Exit Unit Drive Belt

11. Hot Roller Drive Gear12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear14. Drum Drive Gear15. Original Feed Drive Pulley16. Original Feed Drive Belt17. Original Feed Motor18. Original Rear Roller Pulley19. Original Entrance Roller Pulley

A252V503.WMF

A252V501.WMF

16

10

1514131211 1 2 3

4

6

5

89 7

17

- A252 copier only -

18

19

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

SM 1-7 A251/A252

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point(Water proof paper) index numbers.

Name Function Index. No.MotorsMain Drives all mechanical components except the

original feed section (A252only) and the fans. (DCMotor)

32

Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drumsection to the ozone filter. (DC Motor) 5

Original Feed(A252 only)

Drives the original feed section. (DC motor) 45

Magnetic ClutchesRegistration Drives the registration rollers. 30Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

SolenoidsPick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

SwitchesMain Supplies power to the copier. 17Original & PaperFeed Safety

Cuts AC power when the original or paper feedunit is opened. 18

Fusing Exit Safety Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit isopened. 12

SensorsDoor Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel and

prohibits the key operation. 29

Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26Original Registration Detects when the original lead edge passes at the

front of the exposure glass. 4

Light Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output. 27Entrance Feed Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam

detector). 24

Registration Detects when copy paper arrives at theregistration rollers (jam detector). 25

Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7Original Entrance(A252 only)

Detects the original length and the original jam. 43

Original Rear(A252 only)

Detects the original jam. 44

Exit Cover Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel andprohibits the key operation.

47


A251/A252 1-8 SM

Name Function Index. No.Printed Circuit BoardsMain Controls all copier functions both directly and

through other PCBs.22

PSU Converts the AC voltage to DC voltage. 21AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23Operation Panel Control the operation panel display. 10Original Feed Drive(A252 only)

Controls the rotation of the original feed motor. 46

LampsExposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image onto

the drum (fluorescent lamp). 2

Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3Pre-Transfer (PTL) Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to

image transfer. 20

Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drumsurface after cleaning.

1

Power PacksCharge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Provides high voltage power for the chargecorona, charge grid, and development bias. 19

Transfer/Separation Provides high voltage power for the transfercorona and separation.

16

ThermistorsHot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surface

temperature. 11

ThermofusesFusing Protects against fusing overheat. 9

HeatersAnticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier

(option).13

OthersTotal Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made

(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).28


Guards against voltage surges in the input power.14

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

DRUM

SM 2-1 A251/A252

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 DRUM

2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE

The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turnsconstantly when the main motor [B] is on.

When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum as follows:

main motor drive gear [C] ⇒ idle gears [D] ⇒ drum drive gear [E] ⇒drum flange [F] ⇒ drum

When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drumso that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turntogether when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to theoriginal feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I] (A251copier).

The original feed rollers [J] (original entrance and rear rollers) for the A252 copierare driven by the original feed motor [K].

A252D502.WMF

A252D503.WMF

[K]

- A252 copier only -

[G]

[A]

[F]

[C]

[D]

[I]

[H]

[E]

[B]

[J]

EXPOSURE

A251/A252 2-2 SM

2.3 EXPOSURE

2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY)

In this machine (A252 copier), first, the leading edge [A] of the original is insertedinto the original table and the original is delivered to the appropriate start position.Then the original is switched back while it is being scanned. Therefore, the originalis scanned from the trailing edge to the leading edge.

When an original is placed on the original table, it activates the original entrancesensor [B]. The main motor starts rotating and the quenching lamp, developmentbias, and PTL begin. Then, the exposure lamp turns on. To ensure correct originalfeeding (especially for a thin original), the original is returned toward the operatorside (300 ms) before the original feed. Thus the original will be fed evenly by eachroller on the original entrance roller [C].

4 seconds after the original entrance sensor is activated, the original feed motorstarts rotating 200 mm/s to turn the original entrance rollers [C] and the originalrear rollers [J]. The original is delivered to the original feed start position [D]. The 4second delay allows time for the operator to align the trailing edge (non-operatorside) against the first set of the rollers (to prevent skewing).

A252D500.WMF A252D501.WMF

[A]

[D]

[J]

[K][B][C]

[G] [H] [I]

[F]

J: Original Rear RollerK: Original Rear Sensor

15 mm

26 mm

[E]

EXPOSURE

SM 2-3 A251/A252

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

When the original entrance sensor is turned off by the trailing edge [E] of theoriginal, the roll paper feed motor turns on and paper feeding starts.When the trailing edge of the original reaches the original feed start position (26mm ahead of the original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops towait for the copy paper.The registration clutch is activated after paper feed begins. The copy paper is fedto the registration roller [G] and the registration clutch turns off when the copypaper reaches 15 mm ahead of the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is appliedto the charge corona.At the appropriate time the original feed motor rotates 50 mm/s in oppositedirection and the original is delivered to the exposure glass. The registration clutchand roll paper feed motor turn on again after the trailing edge of the original passesthe original entrance sensor. The paper feed resumes and the copy paper istransported to the drum [I].To measure the original length for synchro-cutting, the copier CPU measures thetime from when the original registration sensor detects the leading edge of theoriginal until the original entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the original(delivering the original to appropriate start position). The copy paper length ismeasured by counting the number of steps as the roll paper feed motor (steppermotor) turns. Just before the cut length of the copy paper is fed, the speed of theroll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of thecopy paper. When the copy paper is fed out to the appropriate length, the rollpaper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper.When making duplicate copies, at the appropriate time after the trailing edge of theoriginal passes at the original registration sensor, the rotation of the original feedmotor changes in the opposite direction and the speed of the original feed motorchanges to 200 mm/s. The roll paper feed motor starts again. The original isdelivered to the original feed start position and roll paper feed starts again. Theabove process is repeated. After all the duplicates have been made, the original isstopped and caught by the original entrance roller (original hold mode: SP16). Ifthe original hold mode is canceled by SP16, the original is fed out without beingcaught in the original entrance roller. During this procedure the original rear sensor[K] determines the end of the original.When the original hold mode is selected, the original is fed out when the $ key ispressed.

DEVELOPMENT

A251/A252 2-4 SM

2.4 DEVELOPMENT

2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

Recovery from Toner End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), themain motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During this period, toneris supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3. Then, the mainmotor rotates the development unit for another 30 seconds. Then copies can bemade.

If the TS level does not reach 3 after rotation of the development unit, the CPUstops the machine and displays the toner end condition. This prevents the operatorfrom resetting the toner end condition by simply opening and closing original feedunit.

FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

SM 2-5 A251/A252

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER)

The copy paper is delivered to the lower paper exit.

The location of the fusing exit sensor is different from the A163 and A251 copier.Except for this difference, the A252 copier is identical to the with A251 and A163copiers. Please refer to A163 copier service manual for details.

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

SM 3-1 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

3. INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 15°C to 30°C (59°F to 86°F)


3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to directsunlight).

4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3

Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person.

5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)

6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine asfollows:

a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low tohigh, or vice versa.

b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner inthe summer.

c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heaterin the winter.

7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.

8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.


10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strongvibration.


A251/A252 3-2 SM

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)

3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)

4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level



A252I505.WMF

Back 600 mm

Right600 mm

Back 1,000 mm

Left600 mm


SM 3-3 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 HzMore than 15 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 HzMore than 7 A (for European version)

2. Permissible VoltageFluctuation:

±10%


NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.2) Avoid multi-wiring.

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

A251/A252 3-4 SM


3.2.1 COPIER

Accessory Check


- A252 copier -

Original Guide ......................................................................... 6 pcs

Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc

- A251 copier -

Guide Wire .............................................................................. 2 pcs

Copy Tray ............................................................................... 1 pc

Copy Guide............................................................................. 1 pc

Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc


SM 3-5 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is beinginstalled on the table.

2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the tableholes [E]).

WARNINGThe copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard maycause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.

A252I500.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E][E]


A251/A252 3-6 SM

3. Open the paper path section [A].

4. Remove the right upper cover [B] (2 screws).

5. Remove the drum protection sheet [C] and remove the screw [D] to applycleaning blade pressure to the drum.

6. Open the fusing exit section. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [E] andprotection sheet [F].

7. Remove two strips of shipping tape [G]. (Close the paper path section andfusing exit section.)

A252I501.WMF

A252I510.WMF

A252I502.WMF

[A]

[B]

[G]

[F]

[D]

[E]

[E]

[C]


SM 3-7 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

8. Remove two shipping cushions [A].

9. Open the original feed unit [B], manual feed table [C], and toner supply cover[D]. Remove a sheet [E] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of thedeveloper [F] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.NOTE: Close the paper path section while opening the toner supply cover.

Otherwise, the toner supply cover will drop.


A252I503.WMF

A252I504.WMF

A252I511.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[E]

[A]


A251/A252 3-8 SM

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°C when the main switch is turnedon, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to access theSP mode to load the total 2kg of developer (Steps 11 to 14).Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer isloaded from the development entrance. Then, pour in another kg ofdeveloper.

11. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear Mode key [A]+ key [B]+ keyClear/Stop key [C]

12. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench andtoner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).

13. Select 23 using the + key and – key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. Themain motor will rotate.

14. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loadedfrom the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into thedevelopment unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the ClearModes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

A252I508.WMF

[C]

[E]

[A]

[B][D]


SM 3-9 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

15. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear key [A]+ key [B]– key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]

16. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper endand call service indicators will blink (SP mode).

17. Select 36 using the + and – keys. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F]Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operatingmode from SP mode.

A252I508.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B][C][E]


A251/A252 3-10 SM

18. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

19. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until itstops.

A252I507.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]


SM 3-11 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

A252 copier only (step 20)

20. Install the original guides [A].

A251 copier only (step 21 and 22)

21. Attach the guide wires [B] to the copy tray [C].

22. Install the copy tray [C] and copy guide [D].



A252I506.WMF

A252I509.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]


A251/A252 3-12 SM

3.2.2 TABLE (A836)

Accessory Check


Top Plate ............................................................................... 1

Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1

Right Side Plate ..................................................................... 1

Middle Plate ........................................................................... 1

Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1

Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ..................................... 14


SM 3-13 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces aroundthe screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two componentsmeet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of theleft plate.

1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).

2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.

3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).

NOTE: If the optional copy tray is installed after copier installation, install the frontcopy tray stay [I] and rear copy tray stay [J] after step 3.

4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.

5. Put the table the correction way up.

A836I501.WMF

A836I500.WMF

[C]

[E]

[H]

[D]

[A][G]

[E][C]

[A]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[J]

A, B

[A]

[A]

[I]


A251/A252 3-14 SM

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)

Accessory CheckCheck the accessories and their quantities against the following list:

Front Copy Tray Stay.............................................................. 1

Rear Copy Tray Stay .............................................................. 1

Copy Tray Support.................................................................. 1

Copy Tray Guide..................................................................... 2

Copy Tray Sheet ..................................................................... 3

Nylon Clamp ........................................................................... 1

Rear Copy Tray....................................................................... 3

Copy Tray Stopper.................................................................. 2

Screw...................................................................................... 13

Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Short................................................. 2

Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Center .............................................. 1

NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the A252 copier. When the copy tray isinstalled on the copier, the table (A836-00) is required.


SM 3-15 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

1. Install the front copy tray stay [A] and rear copy tray stay [B] (4 screws each).

NOTE: This step should be done during the table installation when the table andthe copy tray are installed at the same time. Refer to the table installationprocedure. If the copy tray is installed after the copier installation, removethe roll feeder and copier from the table, then loosen the screws of thetable, then do step 1.

2. Install the copy tray guides [C] (1screw each).

3. Install the copy tray support [D] (2 truss screws).

A836I501.WMF

A836I502.WMF

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]


A251/A252 3-16 SM

4. Adhere the copy tray sheets with rubber [A] to the middle plate [B] of the tableso that the copy tray sheets are positioned between the screw holes [C] on therear copy tray stay [D] as shown in the illustration.

5. Hook the rear copy trays [E] onto the rear copy tray stay [D].

6. Secure the copier power supply cord [F] to prevent the cord from interferingwith the paper path (1 nylon clamp [G] and 1 screw).

A836I503.WMF

A836I504.WMF

[C]

[C][D]

[A]

[B]

[D][E]

[F]

[G]

[E]

[A]


SM 3-17 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

7. Adhere the rear copy tray sheet - center (long) [A] and the two rear copy traysheets - short [B] onto the exit cover as shown.

8. Adhere the copy tray stoppers [C] to the front side of the table middle plate [D].

A836I505.WMF

A836I508.WMF

A836I506.WMF

[C]

[D]

[D]

[C]

265 ± 5 mm 265 ± 5 mm

[A]

[B][A][B]


A251/A252 3-18 SM

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER (A571)

CAUTIONUnplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

Accessory Check


Harness Cover ....................................................................... 2 pcs

Angle Bracket ......................................................................... 1 pc

Spacer ................................................................................... 1 pc

Small Cap ............................................................................... 1 pc

Screws - M4 x 8 ..................................................................... 8 pcs

Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ...................................... 2 pcs

Washer (220 ~ 240 V versions only) ....................................... 2 pcs

Ground Plate (220 ~ 240 V versions only) .............................. 2 pcs

Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 for Ground Plate(220 ~ 240 V versions only) .................................................... 2 pcs

NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714 or A836) isrequired.


SM 3-19 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is beinginstalled on the table and the copier.

NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent theleft and right covers from being damaged.

2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].

3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).

4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to thedown position.

A571I502.WMF

A571I500.WMF

A571I501.WMF

[B]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[E]

[H]

[A] [C]

[D]

[C]

[C]


A251/A252 3-20 SM

5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A](2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).

6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.

7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

A571I503.WMF

A571I505.WMF

A571I504.WMF

[A]

[B][C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

[F]


SM 3-21 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the bracket[A].

8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the manual feedtable [D].

A571I506.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]


A251/A252 3-22 SM

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on bothsides into the mounting rail [B]).NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.

10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).

11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

A571I507.WMF

A571I508.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[C]


SM 3-23 A251/A252

Inst

alla

tion

NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the springwashers [A] are flattened.

12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of thetable.

13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through theholes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F]).

NOTE: There are two versions of the ferrite core [N] for the roll feeder harness.One is gray and the other is white. When installing the gray core version onthe A252 copier, unwind one loop, as shown.

For A252 copier14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board and original feed

motor drive board [K] 2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw withspring washer).

For A251 copier14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board 2 connectors [G] and

1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer).

15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac driveboard connector.

16. 220 ~ 240 V versions onlyInstall the ground plates [L, M] (1 screw with spring washer and 1 washereach).

17. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).

18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder rightcover.

A571I513.WMF

A571I510.WMF

A571I512.WMF

[E]

[A]

[I]

[C]

[G]

[D]

[J]

[L][H]

[M][N] [K]

[N]

[C]

[F] [A]

[B]

[G]

[C]

- A251 copier -


A251/A252 3-24 SM

LengthTemperature

300 PRG.NO. 1100 PRG.

NO.NORMAL XX 42 XX 45HIGH (VELLUM) XX 43 XX 46LOW (FILM) XX 44 XX 47


20. Press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear Modes key [A]+ key [B]– key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]

21. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds. Theroll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).

22. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F].

23. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that isattached to stuck on the right side plate.


25. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.


A571I514.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B][C][E]

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-1 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4. SERVICE TABLES

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

All items except for the following are common with the A163 copier. Please refer tothe A163 copier service manual.

Service Program Mode Table


*6


Refer to the A163 service manual for details.The paper from the roll feeder is fed out onlywhen the roll feeder is attached to the A251copier.

0: 2 minutes1:1 minute2: 2 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes

*13

Original Feed OutWaiting TimeSetting

Select the time to when the original isautomatically fed out after it has been set onthe original table in the manual feed mode.(A252 copier only)

0: 2 minutes1:1 minute2: 2 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes5: No auto feed out

*14

Original Feed StartTime Setting

Selects the time to when the original feedroller starts rotating after the originalentrance sensor or original rear sensor forthe rear feed is actuated (A252 copier only).

0: 1 second1: 2 seconds2: 3 seconds3: 4 seconds4: 5 seconds5: 6 seconds6: 7 seconds

*15Auto Shut-off TimeSetting (120 Vmachines only)

Determines the auto shut-off time. 1 ← 30 → 240

*16

Original HoldMode

After original scanning is finished, theoriginal exit roller stops before completelyfeeding out the original. This is to preventthe original from dropping onto the floor afterscanning.The original is fed out when the $ key ispressed or when the next original is insertedA252 copier only).

0: No1: Original Hold mode

*17

Length SizeMagnification

Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor(A252 copier only).The setting can be changed by the keyoperation.

-1.0 (shorter) ← 0.0 →1.0 (longer)

*18

Semi-synchro CutOriginal ScanningMode

Selects whether the roll paper cut key mustbe pressed at the appropriate time when thetrailing edge of the original passes the Semi-synchro cut mark, or whether the originalmust be inserted again after the original isscanned and the length is measured (A251copier only).

0: Pressing the rollpaper cut key

1: Inserting the originalagain

SERVICE TOOLS

A251/A252 4-2 SM


*19

Synchro-cutLength Adjustment

Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchrocut mode (A251 copier).Adjusts the cut length in the synchro cut,preset cut, and variable cut modes (A252copier). The setting can be changed by akey operation.

-25 (Shorter) ← 0 → 25(Longer)1 mm/step

*22

Fixed Paper SizePattern Setting

“42.0” size is added to the following modesin the inch mode: Refer to the A163 copiermanual and page 4-13 of this manual fordetails.0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, and 18

*33 Not Used

48Semi-synchro-cutLength Adjustment

Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchrocut mode (A251 copier only).

-10 (Shorter) ← 0 → 10(Longer)0.1 %/step

49


(Jam code numbers have been changedfrom those used in the A163 copier.) If themain motor speed is incorrect, rJ98 or rJ99will be indicated when a long copy is made.In these cases this adjustment is required.

0: Standard-9 ← 0→ 11

56

Copy NumberLimit Setting

Determines the maximum copy number. Thedefault settings for the A251 and A252copiers are different.

0: 99 sheets (A251)1: 10 sheets (A252)2: 20 sheets3: 30 sheets4: 40 sheets5: 50 sheets6: 60 sheets7: 70 sheets8: 80 sheets9: 90 sheets

57 Not Used

58

Repeat CopyLength LimitSetting

Determines the maximum copy length forrepeat copy (A252 copier only).

0: 1,200 mm/48 inch1: The maximum paper

length determined by SP55.

67MachineOperation Counter

Displays the total time (hours) of themachine operation (total time of the motorrotation).

dc = X,XXX

69Total Copy Length/Number Display(Feet)

Displays the total copy length by feet. SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX

80

DeveloperInitializationNumber Counter

Displays the total number of developerinitializations (SP36). Also displays thedeveloper counter (SP77) at the lastdeveloper initialization.

dnF = XX (total numberof developerinitializations)

Hde = XX,XXX (developer counter at the last developer initialization

81

Toner EndNumber Counter

Displays the total number of toner endconditions (dtE). Also, displays the tonercounter (SP78) at the last toner endcondition (Hdt).

dtE = XXHdt = XX,XXX

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-3 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les


82

Toner Near EndCounter

Displays the total number of toner near endconditions (dtn). Also, displays the tonercounter (SP78) at the last toner endcondition (Hdt).

dtn = XXHdt = XX,XXX

83 Not Used84 Not Used

85


Displays the total number of originals in thepaper length indicator and paper misfeedsby location in the leading edge indicator.

Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)J1 ∼ J8 (initial jam)J10 ∼ J45 (original

jam)J51 ∼ J72 (copy paper

jam)J80 ∼ J99 (roll feeder

paper jam)

90

Number of ServiceCall by Location

Displays the total number of service calls(SC) in the paper length indicator and SCcodes by location in the leading edgeindicator.

Et = X,XXX (total SCs)E1 ∼ E15 (each SC)

91

Service CallRecords

Displays the last five service calls one afterthe other.

E1 = XX (The last SC code)

E2 = XX (1 before the last SC code)

E3 = XX (2 before the last SC code



Beeper (XX = SC code)92 Not Used93 Not Used

SERVICE TOOLS

A251/A252 4-4 SM


-1

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from the RAM.To clear the memory, input the number ofthe item you want to delete, then press the key.Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a

number from 20 to 28 is selected),reinput the factory settings that areshown on the decal attached insidethe upper right cover.Please refer to page 4-14 for thedefault settings for each destination.(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.)

0: Not Used1: Machine Operation

(The memory for SP67)

2: Copy Length Counter(SP69 to 75)

3: OPC Counter (SP76)4: Developer Counter

(SP77) (*Note1)/Developer Initialization Number (SP80)

5: Toner Counter (SP78)/Toner End Number (SP81)/Toner Near End Number (SP82)

6: Counter for toner density step. (*Note2)

7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53.

8: SC Counter(SP90 to 91)

9: Jam Counter(SP85 to 86)

10: Change the settings to the Japan version

*Note1:This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163manual).

*Note2:For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after thedeveloper initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 andafter 150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-5 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-1

11: Change the settings to the U.S.A. version

12: Change the settings to the Europeversion

13: Change the settings to the Asia version

14: Charge the settings to the Hoechstversion

15: Change the settings to the Regmaversion

16: Change the settings to the K+E version

17: Factory use18: Not Used19: Not Used20: Clear all the

memory andchange the settings to the Japaneseversion

21: Clear all thememory andchange the settings to the U.S.A. version

22: Clear all thememory and change the settings to the Europe version

23: Clear all thememory andchange the settings to the Asia version

24: Clear all thememory andchange the settings to the Hoechst version

25: Clear all thememory andchange the settings to the Regma version

26: Clear all thememory andchange the settings to the K+E version

27: Factory use28: Not Used29: Not Used30: Clear all the

memory

SERVICE TOOLS

A251/A252 4-6 SM


-2


Selects the unit in which the total countercounts up by.

0: 1 yard1: 1 m2: 100 inches3: 50 inches4: A1 length (594 mm)5: Sheet (Any size)6: 1 foot

-5RegistrationAdjustment

Adjusts the paper registration. 0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm

Advance Delay

-23

Toner SupplyPeriods in TonerEnd Condition

Selects the periods for supplying toner afterclearing the toner end condition.

0: 60 s1: 70 s2: 80 s3: 90 s

-24Original FeedMotor SpeedAdjustment

Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor(A252 copier only).

-50 (Faster) ← 0 → 50(Slower)0.025 %/step

-27 Factory Use Only

-28

Length SizeMagnificationCompensation onLeading Edge

The fusing roller’s speed is slightly higherthan the drum speed.The speed of the copy paper transport willslightly increase after the leading edge ofthe copy paper enters the fusing unit.To compensate for this, the speed of theoriginal feed motor is corrected from theleading edge to 183 mm (A252 copier only).

-100 ← 10 → 100(Shorter) (Longer)

–2.5% +2.5%

-29

RegistrationAdjustment for theRear Feed

Adjust the paper registration for the rearoriginal feed (A252 only).If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting isused for the paper registration for the frontoriginal feed as well as the rear originalfeed. In this case, this adjustment is addedto the SP#-5 adjustment.

0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm

Advance Delay

-35

Synchro-cutLength AutoAdjustment(297 mm)

Adjusts the original cut length in SynchroCut mode at 297 mm (standard length).Insert the 297 mm length original five times(this number displayed on the copy numberindicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If theactual original length is different from thestandard length, input the following value inthe cut length indicator before inserting theoriginal:

Actual Length - Standard Length

Then the machine automatically calculatesthe correction value. The data is overwrittenon SP#-38.

-9.9 ← 0 → 9.91 step = 0.1 mm

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-7 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-36

Synchro-cutLength AutoAdjustment(1,189 mm)

Adjusts the original cut length in SynchroCut mode at 1189 mm.Insert the 1189 mm length original five times(this number displayed on the copy numberindicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If theactual original length is different from thestandard length, input the following value inthe cut length indicator before inserting theoriginal:


Then the machine automatically calculatesthe correction value. The data is overwrittenon SP#-39.

-50 ← 0 → 501 step = 0.1 mm

-37 Not Used

-38

Synchro-cutLength ManualAdjustment(297 mm)

Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 297mm original is used. Increasing the numberwill shorten the paper cut length.

-9.9 ← 0 → 9.91 step = 0.1 mm(This value is overwritten when SP#-35 isperformed.)

-39

Synchro-cutLength ManualAdjustment(1,189 mm)

Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 1,189mm original is used. Increasing the numberwill shorten the paper cut length.

-50.0 ← 0 → 501 step = 0.1 mm(This value is overwritten when SP#-36 isperformed.)

-62

Light SensorVoltage Display(Factory use)

Displays the real time light sensor outputvoltage.In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL andthe bias voltage for non-image areas can beturned on and off using the Copy Media key.

Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF

Even if the SP mode is canceled, thevoltage is displayed during the stand-bycondition or copy cycling.To release this condition, turn the mainswitch off and on.

Fd = X,XXFd = Light Sensor

Voltage

-70

Synchro-cut RearFeed Mode

Normally, an original cannot be insertedfrom the rear side in Synchro-cut mode. If 1is selected in this mode, an original can beinserted from the rear side even if Synchro-cut mode is selected. This mode cannot beused with the trailing edge margin function.In this mode, the copy will be 194 mm longerthan the original (A252 copier only).

0: Normal1: Synchro-cut Rear

Feed Mode

SERVICE TOOLS

A251/A252 4-8 SM


-71

Cut LengthDisplay Mode

In semi-synchro cut mode, the machinestores the 1st original cut length anddisplays it in the paper length counter. In thiscase, the paper cut mode will beautomatically changed to thePreset/Variable cut mode. It is notnecessary to press the cut key at the trailingedge of the original from the 2nd copypaper.Before the 2nd original is inserted in theoriginal table, the cut length in the cut lengthcounter can be changed with the “+”/“–”keys within the range of the semi-synchrocut (410 mm ~ 2,000, 16.5' ~ 80.0').

0: Non-Length Display1: Length Display

-72Original FeedMotor ReturningSpeed Setting

Selects the speed of the original feed motorin returning original mode. A slower speedmay be effective for the thinner original.

0: 200 mm/s1: 150 mm/s2: 100 mm/s

-73

Roll Feeder StartTiming

Selects the Roll Feeder start timing, justafter the original entrance sensor detects thetrailing edge of the original, or just after theoriginal entrance sensor detects theinsertion of the original.The setting change from 0 to 1 makes thefirst copy faster and 1 to 1 CPM increases. Ifthe emergency stop key is pressed while theoriginal is being transported to the scanningstart position from the original insertion, it isnecessary to check for paper left betweenthe copier and roll feeder. Whichever settingis selected, the first copy and 1 to 1 CPMare within specification.

0: Trailing edge is detected.

1: Original insertion

-74

Original TransportMode

Select whether the original is transportedfrom the original table to the scanning startposition directly, or whether the original isreturned to the scanning start position afterthe trailing edge of the original passesthrough the original registration sensor(A252 copier only).The default setting (= 0) is effective forusage of curled originals. If the setting ischanged from 0 to 1, perform thesynchro-cut length auto adjustment (SP#-35,#-36).

0: Original is transported directly to the start position.

1: Original is returned to the start position after the original passes through the original registration sensor.

-75

FusingTemperatureRecovery Setting

Determines how the machine recovers whenthe fusing temperature becomes lower thanthe target value during repeat copyoperation when selecting mode 8 (highesttemperature mode) (A252 copier only).

0: No recovery(The machine simply continues copying, ignoring the fusing temperature.)

1: Stops copying and feeds out the original.

2: Stops copying but the original is not fed out. Copying starts again after the fusing temperature recovers.

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-9 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table

The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paperlength indicator (“ON” or “OFF” is displayed). If a program number not used isselected, “NOT” is displayed.

Program No. Sensor/Switch/Signal-1 Registration Sensor-2 Exit Sensor-3 Original Registration Sensor-4 Entrance Sensor

-5 Main Motor LOC Signal(Status is “ON” when the main motor is normally rotating.)

-6 Door Switch(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)

-7 Original Entrance Sensor (A252 copier only)-8 Original Rear Sensor (A252 copier only)-9 Not Used

-10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor-11 Roll Feeder Door Switch-12 Right Cutter Switch-13 Left Cutter Switch-14 Paper End Sensor

-16 Exit Cover Open(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)

SERVICE TOOLS

A251/A252 4-10 SM

Output Check Mode Table

Press the Bypass Select key to turn on the selected electrical component. Thestatus of the component is displayed in the paper length indicator.

To turn off the component, press the Bypass Select key again.

Program No. Electrical Component Note0 Main Motor1 Toner Supply Clutch2 Pick off solenoid3 Registration Clutch4 Total Counter5 Pre-transfer Lamp6 Quenching Lamp7 Fusing Lamp8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)10 Main Charge Corona11 Grid Voltage12 Transfer Charge Corona13 Not Used14 Separation Charge Corona


23 Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for theNon-image Area + Quenching Lamp

24 Original Feed Motor (Forward)(A252 copier only)

25Original Feed Motor (Reverse)(A252 copier only)

26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note

28 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor

30

Original Feed Motor(Forward and Reverse)(A252 copier only)

Original feed motoroperation changes everytime the roll feed key ispressed.1st time: Forward2nd time: Stop3rd time: Reverse4th time: Stop

34 Main Switch OFF (Energy Star) Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutterswitches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in thepaper length indicator.

JAM CODE LIST

SM 4-11 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4.4 JAM CODE LIST

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE

Code Cause of Jam RemarksdJ01 Initial misfeed at the original entrance sensor. A252 onlydJ02 Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.dJ03 Initial misfeed at the original rear sensor. A252 onlydJ05 Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.dJ06 Initial misfeed at the registration sensor.dJ07 Initial misfeed at the exit sensor.dJ08 Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll feeder.

dJ10 Original entrance sensor OFF check during the originalscanning process.

A252 only

dJ11 Original entrance sensor ON check during the originalscanning process. A252 only

dJ17 Original entrance sensor OFF check during the originalreturning process. A252 only

dJ18 Original entrance sensor ON check during the originalreturning process. A252 only

dJ21 Original registration sensor leading edge ON check duringthe original scanning process.

A252 only

dJ22 Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check duringthe original scanning process. A252 only

dJ23 Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check duringthe original scanning process. A252 only

dJ25 Original registration sensor leading edge OFF check duringthe original returning process. A252 only

dJ26 Original registration sensor leading edge ON check duringthe original returning process.

A252 only

dJ27 Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check duringthe original returning process.

A252 only

dJ28 Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check duringthe original returning process. A252 only

dJ32 Original rear sensor trailing edge OFF check during theoriginal scanning process. A252 only

dJ33 Original rear sensor trailing edge ON check during theoriginal scanning process.

A252 only

dJ35 Original rear sensor leading edge OFF check during theoriginal returning process.

A252 only

dJ36 Original rear sensor leading edge ON check during theoriginal returning process. A252 only

dJ40 Emergency stop key pressed

dJ41 Original registration sensor OFF condition during the originalscanning process. A252 only

dJ42 Original rear sensor OFF condition during the originalreturning process. A252 only

dJ43Original rear sensor ON condition when clearing the originalhold mode by pressing the $ key.

A252 only

JAM CODE LIST

A251/A252 4-12 SM

Code Cause of Jam Remarks

dJ45 Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper isfed 2,500 mm.

pJ51 Registration sensor OFF condition is detected just afterstarting the copy process.

pJ52 Registration sensor OFF condition is detected beforestarting the roll feeder again.

A251 only

pJ53 Entrance sensor ON condition is detected during rollfeeding.

pJ55 Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed2,500 mm.

pJ60 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.pJ61 Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.pJ62 Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.pJ63 Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.pJ70 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.pJ71 Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.pJ72 Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.rJ80 Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.rJ81 Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.rJ90 Paper cutter failurerJ91 Door open during roll feeding

rJ95Roll feeder.Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more than themaximum paper length.

rJ98 Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing edgeduring roll feeding.

rJ99 Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edgeduring roll feeding.

JAM CODE LIST

SM 4-13 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 2971: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 2452: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700,

600, 500, 400, 300, 2453: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297,

2454: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 2455: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 2456: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 2577: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 2458: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 2459: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813,

788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 25710: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 24511: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 24512: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400,

1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245

13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 245

14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245

15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 24516: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 24517: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 24518: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 24519: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.01: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.02: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.63: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.64: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.65: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.66: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0,

9.67: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.68: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.69: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0,

17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.610: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5,

45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0,9.6

11: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6

JAM CODE LIST

A251/A252 4-14 SM

12: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6

13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0,34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6

14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6

15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.616: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.617: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,

36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.618: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0,

20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.619: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. Japan U.S.A. Europe Asia Regma/Ozalid K + E#1 1 2 2 2 2 2#2 0 0 0 0 0 0#3 1 1 1 1 1 1#4 0 0 0 0 1 0#5 2 2 2 2 2 2#6 0 0 0 0 0 0#7 0 0 0 0 0 0#8 0 0 0 0 0 0#9 0 0 0 0 0 0

#10 0 0 0 0 0 0#13 0 0 0 0 0 0#14 0 0 0 0 0 0#15 30 30 — — — 30#17 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0#19 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0#20 0 1 0 0 0 1#21 0 0 0 0 0 0#22 0 0 0 0 0 0#-2 1 6 1 1 1 6#-3 0 1 0 0 0 1

#13, #14, #17: A252 only

SERVICE REMARKS

SM 4-15 A251/A252

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Service Remark for 220 ∼∼ 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive boardas shown correctly

1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on thenoise filter.

2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on thenoise filter.

3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3on the noise filter.

4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal4 on the noise filter

5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 onac drive board.

6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202on ac drive board.

A252M500.WMF

Noise Filter

AC Drive Board

TB201TB202

SERVICE REMARKS

A251/A252 4-16 SM

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly

1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector toTB201 on ac drive board.

2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector toTB202 on ac drive board.

A252M500.WMF

AC Drive Board

TB201TB202


OPTICS

SM 5-1 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t


5.2 OPTICS

5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the left and right upper covers.

2. Remove the upper original guide [A].

3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feedunit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (1 screw and 2 connectors).

4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.

5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn andremove.

A252R500.WMF

A252R501.WMF

[C][A] [D]

[B]

[E]

[F]

[G]

OPTICS

A251/A252 5-2 SM

5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the original feed unit.

2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (1 screw).

3. Remove the exposure glass stoppers [B] (2 screws).

4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting upthe left side as shown.

NOTE: Make sure that the edge cut side [D] of the exposure glass is towards theupper side when reassembling.

5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the exposure glass.

2. Open the toner supply cover [E] and remove the front original guide plate [F] (1screw).

3. Remove the rear original guide plate [G] (4 screws and 1 pin [H]).

4. Lift up the fiber optics array [I] and remove it from the left side by sliding it out tothe right side as shown.NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [J] of the

fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [K].

A252R510.WMF

A252R502.WMF

[D]

[H]

[F]

[B] [G]

[E]

[C]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[I]

[K]

[J]

OPTICS

SM 5-3 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL

1. Remove the fiber optics array.NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the

exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.

2. Turn the exposure lamp [A] 1/4 of a turn and remove.NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [B] of the exposure lamp is

towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

A252R511.WMF

[B]

[A]

[A]

OPTICS

A251/A252 5-4 SM

5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 2 of the fiber optics array removal.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

A252R503.WMF

[A]

OPTICS

SM 5-5 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY)

This adjustment should be carried out when the original registration and/or originalentrance sensor is replaced.

1. Measure the actual length of A3 (297) and A0 (1189) originals.

2. Access SP#-35 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 297 mm) and input thedifference between the measured length and 297 mm.

3. Press the “RF Select” key. The copy quantity indicator blinks. Input the testcopy number (default: 5).

4. Press the “RF Select” key.

5. Place the measured original (A3) on the original feed table. If the original is notplaced correctly (placed diagonally), by pressing the $ key once, this stepcan be canceled only one time. Otherwise, carry out this procedure from thebeginning.

6. Repeat step 5 until the number in the blinking copy quantity indicator is “0”.

7. Press the “RF Select” key.

8. Access SP#-36 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 1,189 mm) and carry outthe adjustment in the same way as for the 297 mm adjustment.

DRUM UNIT

A251/A252 5-6 SM

5.4 DRUM UNIT

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL


2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.

3. Remove the timing belt [B] (A251 copier)/grounding plate spring [B] (A252copier) and disconnect the harness connector [C].

4. Remove the drum unit [D].

5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor.NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on the

pins [F] of the copier side plates.2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

A252R504.WMF

A252R505.WMF

[A]

[E]

[F]

[B]

[C] [D]

[A]

[B]

FUSING

SM 5-7 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

5.5 FUSING

5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

NOTE: Close the paper path section to remove and reinstall the fusing unit.


2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.Remove the screws [C] for the grounding wires.

3. Disconnect the connector [D], remove the screw [E], and flex the hinge arms [F]of the exit cover slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.

4. Turn the exit unit [G] 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it bypulling out.NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [H] between the two

pulleys [I] and raise the left hinge [J] using tape [K].

A252R509.WMF

[G]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D]

[J] [K]

[H]

[I]

FUSING

A251/A252 5-8 SM

5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.

7. 220 ~ 240 V version only:Remove the 2 screws [C] and bronze plate [D] (2 screws).

8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [E], pull out the fusingunit.

NOTE: When reinstalling the fusing unit, press down the fusing pressure releasebar [E], set the fusing unit on the guides [F] and align the cuts [G] to theside plates [H] at both ends.

A252R507.WMF

A252R506.WMF

A252R508.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[C]

[F][G] [H]

T & S CORONA UNIT

SM 5-9 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

NOTE: 1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands maycause uneven charging of the drum.

2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper, etc.)

as this will damage the corona wire.4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven

charging of the drum.

Preparation

1. Remove the T & S corona unit.

2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

A252R512.WMF

[A]

[B]

[H]

[E]

[G]

[G]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[D]

T & S CORONA UNIT

A251/A252 5-10 SM

Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].

2. Hook one end of the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the rightendblock.

3. Hook the center part of the separation corona wire on the spring [E] of the leftendblock.

4. Set the wire on the slots [F].

5. While pushing the spring in the direction of the arrow, hook the other end [G] ofthe separation corona wire on the terminal of the right endblock.

6. Make sure the wire is set on the slots [F].

Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [H].

2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

SM 5-11 A251/A252

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Registration is not within the adjustment standard.Purpose: To maintain proper registration.

AdjustmentStandard:

0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12")

Perform: SP#-5, SP#-27 (A252 rear original feed)How: Change the registration roller start timing by SP#-5 and/or SP#-27

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check theregistration.

2. Adjust the registration using SP#-5 and/or SP#-27 if the registration is notwithin the adjustment standard.

TROUBLESHOOTING

SERVICE CALL CONDITION

SM 6-1 A251/A252

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITION

The following service conditions are newly added as the A251 and A252 copiers.For other SC conditions, refer to the A163 copier for details. To clear SC E-15,access SP38 and change the data from “1” to “0”.

6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTIONABNORMAL

- Definition -

The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second after the main switch isturned on.

- Points to check -

• Main board• AC Drive board

6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL(U.S.A. VERSION ONLY)

- Definition -

The main switch does not turn off within 0.45 second after sending reset signal.

- Points to check -

• Main switch• Main board

BLOWN FUSE TABLE

A251/A252 6-2 SM

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Europe VersionFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU301 250 V 5A No power.FU302 250 V 6.3 A Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.FU303 250 V 6.3 A No indication. Beeper sound.FU304 250 V 6.3 A E = 10 is indicated.

U.S.A. VersionFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU301 125 V 8A No power.FU302 125 V 6.3 A Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.FU303 125 V 6.3 A No indication. Beeper sound.FU304 125 V 6.3 A E = 10 is indicated.

AC Drive BoardFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU201 250 V 15 A(U.S.A. version only)

No power.

CB201 250 V 8 A(Europe version only)

No power.

B047/B048

SERVICE MANUAL– Insert Version –

The B047/B048 machines are based on the A163/A251/A252 copiers.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the basecopier’s service manual. It should always be utilized together with the basecopier’s service manual.

INSERTION PROCEDURE OF SERVICE MANUAL1. Replace the book spine tag with the new one.

2. Insert the B047/B048 service manual after the A163/A251/A252 manual.

SM i B047/B048

B047/B048TABLE OF CONTENTS

This manual describes new items for the J2SS-C3 (B047/B048).Please refer to the J2SS Mark II (A251/A252) manual for the descriptions markedwith “*” in page column.

OVERALL INFORMATION

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION........................................ 1-11.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................1-11.2 PAPER PATH............................................................................................1-31.3 DRUM PROCESSES ............................................................................... * 1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................1-41.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................... * 1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..................................................................1-6

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 2-12.1 DRUM....................................................................................................... *

2.1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................... * 2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE.................................................................................. *

2.2 CHARGE .................................................................................................. * 2.2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT ......................................................... * 2.2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION ....................................................... *

2.3 EXPOSURE...............................................................................................2-12.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)..................................2-1

Basic Operation (Manual Feed) ........................................................... * Original Jam Check Timing.................................................................. * Drive Mechanism ................................................................................. * Original Positioning...............................................................................2-1Scanning...............................................................................................2-2Start Key Enable...................................................................................2-3

2.3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL........................................................... * 2.3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL................................................................... *

Manual ID Control ................................................................................ * 2.4 DEVELOPMENT .......................................................................................2-4

2.4.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... * 2.4.3 CROSS-MIXING.............................................................................. * 2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ..........................................................2-4

Toner Near End Condition ................................................................... *

B047/B048 ii SM

Recovery from Toner End Condition.....................................................2-5Toner Density Sensor .......................................................................... *

2.4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS .................................................................... * Basic Concept...................................................................................... * Manual Image Density Bias ................................................................. *

2.4.6 TONER SUPPLY............................................................................. * 2.5 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION.................................... *

2.5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) ........................................................ * 2.5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER......................................................................... * 2.5.3 PAPER SEPARATION .................................................................... * 2.5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM................................................................. * 2.5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT................................................................... *

2.6 CLEANING ............................................................................................... * 2.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION ..........................................................2-6

2.7 QUENCHING............................................................................................ * 2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ......................................................................2-7

2.8.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-72.8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... *

Fusing Unit Drive ................................................................................. * 2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ............................................................2-8

Fusing Circuit Operation ...................................................................... * Overheat Protection............................................................................. * Hot Roller Temperature Control............................................................2-8

2.8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................... * The Ready Condition ........................................................................... * Fusing Unit Operating Modes .............................................................. *

2.8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION......................................................... * 2.8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT............................................ *

2.9 OTHERS .................................................................................................. * 2.9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL ..................................................................... *

2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION) ......................................................................2-9

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 3-13.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3-1

3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................3-13.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................3-23.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................3-23.1.4 POWER SOURCE............................................................................3-3

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................3-43.2.1 COPIER............................................................................................3-4

Accessory Check ..................................................................................3-4B048 copier only (step 21) ..................................................................3-12B047 copier only (step 22 and 23) ......................................................3-12

SM iii B047/B048

Both copiers (step 24 and 25).............................................................3-123.2.2 TABLE (B439) ................................................................................3-13

Accessory Check ................................................................................3-133.2.3 COPY tray (B440)...........................................................................3-15

Accessory Check ................................................................................3-153.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 and 2 (B435/b436) ..............................................3-19

Accessory Check ................................................................................3-193.2.5 Roll Cutting Rail (B437) ..................................................................3-28

SERVICE TABLES

4. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 4-14.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................... *

4.1.1 PM TABLE....................................................................................... * 4.1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE ......................................................... *

4.2 SERVICE TABLES................................................................................... * 4.2.1 TEST POINTS ................................................................................. *

Main Board .......................................................................................... * Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. *

4.2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ................................................................. * Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. * T&S Power Pack.................................................................................. *

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS......................................................................................4-14.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........................................................4-1

Service Program Mode Access Procedure .......................................... * Service Program Mode Table ...............................................................4-1

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE....................................................4-23Input/Output Check Mode Access Procedure ...................................... * Input Check Mode Table.....................................................................4-23Output Check Mode Table ..................................................................4-23

4.3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE ........................................... * 4.4 JAM CODE LIST .....................................................................................4-25

4.4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE.................................................................. * 4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.........................................................................4-25

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)........................................4-27Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1) ....................................4-28

4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..................................................... * 4.6 SERVICE REMARKS ..............................................................................4-29

4.6.1 DRUM UNIT .................................................................................... * Drum.................................................................................................... *

4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA......................................................................... * 4.6.3 OPTICS ........................................................................................... * 4.6.4 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................. * 4.6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..................................................... * 4.6.6 CLEANING UNIT............................................................................. * 4.6.7 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................. * 4.6.8 ORIGINAL FEED............................................................................. *

B047/B048 iv SM

4.6.9 PAPER FEED.................................................................................. * 4.6.10 ROLL FEEDER.............................................................................. * 4.6.11 OTHERS........................................................................................ * 4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD.......................................................................4-29

Service Remark for 220 ~ 240 V Version............................................4-29Service Remarks for 120 V Version....................................................4-30


5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 5-15.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ............................................................................... *

5.1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL ...................................................... * Left Upper Cover ................................................................................. * Left Lower Cover.................................................................................. *

5.1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL.................................................... * Right Upper Cover ............................................................................... * Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right LowerRear Covers......................................................................................... *

5.1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL .............................................................. * Rear Cover .......................................................................................... *

5.2 OPTICS .................................................................................................... * 5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)........................... * 5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)............................... * 5.2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ................................. * 5.2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY).......................... * 5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)............................ * 5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) ............... *

5.3 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... * 5.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................. * 5.3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL ................................................................ * 5.3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................ * 5.3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... * 5.3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................... *

Bias Voltage for Image Area ................................................................ * Bias Voltage for Non-image Area ........................................................ *

5.4 DRUM UNIT ..............................................................................................5-15.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL................................................................. * 5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT...................................................................5-15.4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT.............................................. * 5.4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL............................................. * 5.4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT .................................. * 5.4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL................................................. * 5.4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT..................................................... * 5.4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................. *

Charge Current Adjustment ................................................................. * Transfer Current Adjustment................................................................ * Separation Current Adjustment............................................................ *

SM v B047/B048

5.5 FUSING.....................................................................................................5-25.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... * 5.5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT...................................................... * 5.5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT.......................................... * 5.5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ................. * 5.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.............. * 5.5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................... * 5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ..............................5-25.5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT ......................................5-25.5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT .......................................5-3

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT .............................................................................. * 5.6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL ................................................... * 5.6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE

REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. * Preparation .......................................................................................... * Separation Corona Wire Replacement ................................................ * Transfer Corona Wire Replacement .................................................... *

5.7 OTHERS .................................................................................................. * 5.7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT................................................... * 5.7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION.......................... *

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT...............................................................5-45.8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................... * 5.8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT........................................................... * 5.8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT................................................... * 5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT......................................................5-4

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-16.1 COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. *

6.1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY ................................................................... * 6.1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE.................................................................. * 6.1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND ................................................................... * 6.1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND................................................................... * 6.1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY ............................................................... * 6.1.6 PAPER CREASING......................................................................... *

6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................6-16.2.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................6-1

SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal .............................................6-1SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open ..............................................6-1SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open ...........................................6-1SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short ...........................................6-2SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open ..................................6-2SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short ..................................6-2SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat ............................................................6-2SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error ...................................................6-3SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal....................................6-3

B047/B048 vi SM

SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal...................................................6-3SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error ......................6-3SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal...............................................6-4SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal........................6-4SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal .................................................6-4SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature .....................................6-4SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light ....................................6-4

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE ..............................................................................6-56.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT....................................................................6-5

Europe Version .....................................................................................6-5U.S.A. Version ......................................................................................6-5AC Drive Board.....................................................................................6-5

ROLL FEEDER UNIT B435/B436

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION........................................ 7-11.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................7-11.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................7-2

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 7-32.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION.....................................................................7-3

2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION.........................................................................7-32.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION ...........................................................7-52.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM........................................................................7-52.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION.....................................................................7-6

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 7-73.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT...............................................................7-73.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................7-83.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL...................................................................7-93.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................7-103.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................................................7-113.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................................................7-123.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT.................................................................7-13

Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ±3 mm (for Length Shorterthan 420 mm) ±5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) ±11 mm(3,000 mm) .........................................................................................7-13

3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ....................................................7-14

! IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.






7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning toperform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanicaland electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.



OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by acustomer service representative who has completed the training course onthose models.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignitesuddenly when exposed to open flame.



B047/B048 OVERALL INFORMATION

B047/B048 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

B047/B048 INSTALLATION

B047/B048 SERVICE TABLES

B047/B048 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

B047/B048 TROUBLESHOOTING

ROLL FEED UNIT B435/B436

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

2TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 1

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

3TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 4

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

6TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 5

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

8TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 7

Co

mp

aris

on

of

Maj

or

Sp

ecif

icat

ion

s

Item

sF

W74

0A

163

FW

750

A25

1F

W76

0A

252

FW

870

A17

4F

W77

0B

047

FW

780

B04

8C

on

fig

ura

tio

nT

able

Top

Tab

le T

opT

able

Top

Con

sole

Tab

le T

opC

ondo

le

Mac

hin

e L

ife

(A1/

D S

idew

ays)

60K

Cop

ies

60K

Cop

ies

60K

Cop

ies

300K

Cop

ies

60K

Cop

ies

or 5

yrs

60K

Cop

ies

or 5

yrs

PM

Cyc

le (

A1/

D3.

6K3.

6K3.

6K10

K3.

6K3.

6K

Ori

gin

al S

ize

Max

. A0/

EM

ax. A

0/E

Max

. A0/

EM

ax. A

0/E

36"

X 1

18"

36"

X 1

18"

Ori

gin

al L

eng

thM

ax. 2

m /

6.6f

t.M

ax. 2

m /

6.6f

t.M

ax. 2

m /

6.6f

t.M

ax. 3

.6m

/ 11

.8ft.

Max

. 3m

/ 9.

8ft.

Max

. 3m

/ 9.

8ft.

Ori

gin

al S

etti

ng

Fac

e-up

Fac

e-up

Fac

e-do

wn

Fac

e-up

Fac

e-do

wn

Fac

e-do

wn

Syn

cro

niz

edC

ut

No

Yes

with

Rol

l Fee

der

(Man

ual)

Yes

with

Rol

l Fee

der

(Aut

o)Y

es (

Aut

o)Y

es, o

nly

with

Rol

lF

eede

rY

es, o

nly

with

Rol

lF

eede

r

Pro

cess

Sp

eed

50m

m/s

ec50

mm

/sec

50m

m/s

ec90

mm

/sec

60m

m/s

ec60

mm

/sec

Co

py

Sp

eed

(A1/

D)

3 cp

m *

3 cp

m *

3 cp

m *

*

2.4

cpm

*

7.5

cpm

*

6 cp

m *

*

4 cp

m4

cpm

War

m-u

p T

ime

(A1/

D S

idew

ays)

Less

than

300

sec

.Le

ss th

an 3

00 s

ec.

Less

than

300

sec

.Le

ss th

an 3

60 s

ec.

With

in 3

min

.

(180

sec

.)

With

in 3

min

.

(180

sec

.)

1st

Co

py

Tim

e(A

1/D

Sid

eway

s)24

sec

.24

sec

.30

sec

.18

sec

.21

sec

.25

sec

.

Mu

ltip

le C

op

yN

/AN

/A1

to 1

0 (A

0/E

)N

/AN

/A1

to 1

0

Pap

er F

eed

(Sta

nd

ard

)M

anua

l Byp

ass

Man

ual B

ypas

sM

anua

l Byp

ass

2 R

oll F

eede

rs +

Man

ual B

ypas

sM

anua

l Byp

ass

Man

ual B

ypas

s

Op

tio

ns

* 1

Rol

l Fee

der

* R

oll C

uttin

g R

ail

* T

able

* 1

Rol

l Fee

der

* R

oll C

uttin

g R

ail

* T

able

* 1

Rol

l Fee

der

* N

ew T

able

* C

opy

Sta

cker

3rd R

oll F

eede

r*

Rol

l Fee

der,

1 r

oll

* R

oll F

eede

r, 2

rol

ls

* R

oll C

uttin

g R

ail

* T

able

* S

ide

Gui

de

* R

oll F

eede

r, 1

rol

l

* R

oll F

eede

r, 2

rol

ls *

* S

ide

Gui

de

Dim

ensi

on

s(W

x D

x H

)C

op

ier

On

ly

1080

x 5

70 x

490

mm

1080

x 5

70 x

490

mm

1080

x 8

03 x

480

mm

1230

x 6

90 x

1070

mm

1080

x 5

70 x

490

mm

1080

x 6

23 x

480

mm

Wei

gh

t C

op

ier

On

ly17

4 lb

.

79 K

g.

174

lb.

79 K

g.

176

lb.

80 K

g.

430

lb.

195

Kg

174

lbs

79 k

g

176

lbs

80 k

g

* C

opy

Spe

ed 1

- 1

** C

opy

Spe

ed 1

– 1

0

OVERALL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

SM 1-1 B047/B048

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

Configuration: Table top




Copy Size: Same as “Original Size”


First Copy: 21 seconds (A1/D sideways): B047 copier25 seconds (A1/D sideways): B048 copier

Warm-up Time: Within 3 minutes (Room temperature 23°C)

Multi-Copy: B047: Single copies only,B048: Up to 10 copies

Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying has finished (can be set to1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)


Drum Charge: Scorotron corona wire and grid (Negative Charge)




Development: Dual-component dry toner system

Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)



Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection using an inductionsensor


Paper Separation: Dual wire AC corona and pick-off pawls



Image Fusing: Teflon heat roller (upper) and a silicone rubberpressure roller (lower)

Fusing Lamp: Halogen lamp(115 V: 1,200 W, 230 V: 1,200 W)

SPECIFICATIONS

B047/B048 1-2 SM

Self-diagnostic Codes: 16 codes, displayed on the copy counter

Power Source: 115 V/60 Hz, 12 A220 ~ 240V/50, 60 Hz, 7A

Power Consumption: Maximum: 1.4 kWWarm-up: 1.3 kWReady: 0.04 to 1.3 kWCopy cycle: 1.4 kW

Dimensions (W x D x H): B047: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm42.5" x 22.4" x 19.3"

B048: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm42.5" x 24.5" x 18.9"

Weight: B047: 79 kg, 174.0 lbsB048: 80 kg, 176.0 lbs


ConfigurationMain frame Optional equipment

Additional equipment

Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) —Roll cutting rail (B437) —Table (B439) —

B047 copier

Side guides (B438) —Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) Copy tray (B440)

B048 copierSide guide (B438) —

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the B048 copier.2) Key counters cannot be installed on these copiers.3) The B048 requires a roll feeder (either 1 roll or 2 rolls). While the roll

feeders are shipped separately, they are not really optional. One mustbe installed for the B048 to function properly. .


• Roll Holder Unit (B394)• Drum anti-condensation heater


PAPER PATH

SM 1-3 B047/B048

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion1.2 PAPER PATH

A: Original Path

B: Manual Feed Path

C: Roll Feeder Path

D: Paper Exit

E: Original Path: Rear Feeder

There are two versions of this machine. The B047 is the basic version. It can onlymake one copy at a time. The B048 is the multi-print version. It can make multiplecopies of an original (scanning and copying an original multiple times).Both versions can be equipped with either a single or a double paper roll.

B047V102.WMF B048V102.WMF

- B048 copier -

C

B

E

D

A

- B047 copier -

C

B

A

DE

MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

B047/B048 1-4 SM

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

1. 1st Original Feed Roller2. 1st Press Rollers3. Copy Tray4. Exit Rollers5. Fusing Exit Rollers6. Hot Roller7. Pressure Roller8. Gas Spring9. OPC Drum10. T/S Corona Unit11. Main Drive Unit

12. Roll Feed Unit (1 roll or 2 rolls)13. Roll Paper14. Paper Registration Rollers15. Manual Feed Table16. Development Unit17. Toner Cartridge18. 2nd Original Feed Roller19. Original Table20. 2nd Original Press Roller21. Exposure Lamp22. Fiber Optic Array

B047V101.WMF

3

14

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

15

16

17

18

4

20 21 22 1 2

19

MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

SM 1-5 B047/B048

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

23. Original Guide24. Optional Copy Tray25. Original Entrance Roller26. Original Entrance Press Roller

27. Original Roller Feed Motor28. Original Rear Press Roller29. Original Rear Roller

B048V101.WMF

25

26

27 28 29

23

24

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

B047/B048 1-6 SM

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Pointindex (Water proof paper).

Name Function Index. No.MotorsMain Drives all mechanical components except the fans

(DC Motor).32

Exhaust Fan Removes the ozone built up around the drumsection to the ozone filter (DC Motor).

5

Original Feed(B048 only)

Drives the original feed motor (DC Motor). 45

Magnetic ClutchesRegistration Drives the registration rollers. 30Toner Supply Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 31

SolenoidsPick-off Pawl Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6

SwitchesMain Supplies power to the copier. 17Original & PaperFeed Safety

Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed unitare opened. 18

Fusing Exit Safety Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is opened. 12Used Toner Cover “Door Open” is displayed on the operation panel

when the used toner cover is open.48

SensorsDoor Open Indicates “Door Open” on the operation panel and

prevents operation.29

Toner Density Detects the density of toner in the developer. 26Original Registration Activates when the leading edge of the original

passes the front of the exposure glass. 4

Light Measures the intensity of the exposure lamp’soutput.

27

Entrance Feed Activates when copy paper is inserted (jamdetector).

24

Registration Activates when copy paper arrives at theregistration rollers (jam detector). 25

Exit Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. 7Original Entrance(B048 only)

Measures the original length and detects jams. 43

Original Rear(B048 only)

Detects original jams. 44

Exit Cover Open Indicates “Door Open” in the operation panel andprevents operation.

47

Toner Overflow Detects whether the used toner tank is full or not. 46

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SM 1-7 B047/B048

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ionName Function Index. No.

Printed Circuit BoardsMain Controls all copier functions both directly and

through other PCBs.22

PSU Converts the voltage from AC to DC voltage. 21AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. 15FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. 23Operation Panel Controls the operation panel display. 10

LampsExposure Provides light to reflect the original’s image onto

the drum (fluorescent lamp).2

Fusing Provides heat to the fusing unit. 3Pre-Transfer (PTL) Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to

image transfer. 20

Quenching (QL) Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drumsurface after cleaning.

1

Power PacksCharge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Provides high voltage power for the charge corona,charge grid, and development bias. 19

Transfer/Separation Provides high voltage power for the transfer coronaand separation.

16

ThermistorsHot Roller Monitors the hot roller’s surface temperature. 8Pressure Roller Monitors the pressure roller’s surface temperature. 11

ThermofusesFusing Protects the fusing unit against overheating. 9

HeatersAnti-condensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier

(option).13

OthersTotal Counter Keeps track of the total length of copies made

(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).28


Guards against voltage surges in the input power.14

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

EXPOSURE

SM 2-1 B047/B048

Det

aile

dD

escr

ipti

on

s


2.3 EXPOSURE

2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)

NOTE: For clarity’s sake, the following description will refer to the paper’s edgesas edge [A] (furthest edge from the operator) and edge [B] (closest to theoperator).

Original Positioning

In the B048 copier, edge [A] of the original is placed onto the original table. Thisactivates the original entrance sensor [C].

The main motor turns the original entrance rollers [D]. The quenching lamp,development bias and PTL also turn on.

For proper feeding (especially for a thin original), the original entrance rollers rotatebackwards (feeding towards the operator) for 300 ms. This ensures that the originalis gripped firmly by both of the original entrance rollers [D], feeding it evenly.

B047D500.WMFB047D501.WMF

[B]

[A] [M]

[E]

[J]

[K][C]

[G] [H] [I]

[F]

J: Original Rear RollerK: Original Rear SensorL: Fiber Optics Array

10 mm

26 mm

[D]

[L]

EXPOSURE

B047/B048 2-2 SM

4 seconds after the sensor is activated,the original feed motor starts rotating.This delay gives the user time to alignedge [A] against the original entrancerollers [D]. This helps prevent skew.

The original is fed through the machine tothe scanning start position [E]. Thismachine scans the original backwards, starting with edge [B] and scanning towardsedge [A]. The original is now ready to scan.

Scanning

The original is scanned, moving back towards the operator.

When edge [A] activates the original registration sensor [F], the roll paper feedmotor turns on. Copy paper begins to feed, and the registration clutch is activated.

When edge [B] reaches the original feed start position [E] (26 mm ahead of theoriginal registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to wait for the copypaper.

In the copy section, the registration clutch turns off once the copy paper’s leadingedge is 10 mm past the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is now applied to thecharge corona.

The original feed motor begins rotating towards the operator again at 60 mm/s, andthe original is delivered to the exposure glass. Light from the exposure lamp [M] isreflected off the paper to the fiber optics array [L].

Once the original’s edge [B] passes the original entrance sensor, the registrationclutch and roll paper feed motor turn on again. The paper feed resumes and thecopy paper is transported to the drum [I].

To measure the original length for cutting, the copier’s CPU measures the timefrom when the original registration sensor detects edge [A] until the originalentrance sensor detects edge [B].

The copy paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the rollpaper feed motor (a stepper motor) turns. Just before the paper is cut, the feedmotor speed doubles. This creates a buckle at the trailing edge of the copy paper.The feed motor then stops as the cutter unit cuts the paper. Copying, however,continues. The buckle provides the necessary slack while cutting.

When making duplicate copies, the original feed motor pauses, then changesdirections again, and the original is fed back to the scanning position 200 mm/s.Once previous paper exits out of the roll feeder, the roll paper feed starts as well,and the process repeats.

After all copies are made, the original is delivered to the original table. If originalhold mode is enabled (SP16), the original will stop with edge [A] caught by theoriginal entrance rollers. The original can be fed out by pressing the ! key. Iforiginal hold mode is not enabled, the original feeds out completely, and is notcaught.

[A]

[B]

EXPOSURE

SM 2-3 B047/B048

Det

aile

dD

escr

ipti

on

s

Start Key Enable

When the start key enabled (SP34) is set, the start key acts as a starting trigger. Inthis mode, when the original activates the original registration sensor, edge [B] isdelivered to the original registration sensor position. Everything pauses until theuser presses the start key. Original feed and paper feed then resume.

DEVELOPMENT

B047/B048 2-4 SM

2.4 DEVELOPMENT

2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.

TSLevel

0 ~ 50 sheets(~ 30 m)

51 ~ 100sheets

(30 ~ 60 m)

101 ~ 150sheets

(60 ~ 90 m)

151 ~ 200sheets

(90 ~ 120 m)

201 ~ 250sheets

(120 ~ 150 m)

251 sheets ~(150 m ~)

0 VTS < 4.00 VTS < 3.50 VTS < 3.00 VTS < 2.50 VTS < 2.25 VTS < 2.00

1 4.00 ≤ VTS <4.10

3.50 ≤ VTS <3.80

3.00 ≤ VTS <3.50

2.50 ≤ VTS <3.00

2.25 ≤ VTS <2.70

2.00 ≤ VTS <2.40

2 4.10 ≤ VTS <4.20

3.80 ≤ VTS <4.10

3.50 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.00 ≤ VTS <3.50

2.70 ≤ VTS <3.15

2.40 ≤ VTS <2.80

3 4.20 ≤ VTS <4.30

4.10 ≤ VTS <4.20

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.20

3.50 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.15 ≤ VTS <3.60

2.80 ≤ VTS <3.20

4 4.30 ≤ VTS <4.40

4.20 ≤ VTS <4.35

4.20 ≤ VTS <4.30

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.25

3.60 ≤ VTS <3.90

3.20 ≤ VTS <3.60

N

5 4.40 ≤ VTS 4.35 ≤ VTS 4.30 ≤ VTS 4.25 ≤ VTS 3.90 ≤ VTS 3.60 ≤ VTS


1 4.35 ≤ VTS <4.38

4.30 ≤ VTS <4.33

4.25 ≤ VTS <4.30

3.75 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.25 ≤ VTS <3.50

2.75 ≤ VTS <3.20

2 4.38 ≤ VTS <4.40

4.33 ≤ VTS <4.36

4.30 ≤ VTS <4.33

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.10

3.50 ≤ VTS <3.80

3.20 ≤ VTS <3.60

3 4.40 ≤ VTS <4.42

4.36 ≤ VTS <4.40

4.33 ≤ VTS <4.36

4.10 ≤ VTS <4.20

3.80 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.60 ≤ VTS <3.90

4 4.42 ≤ VTS <4.45

4.40 ≤ VTS <4.43

4.36 ≤ VTS <4.40

4.20 ≤ VTS <4.38

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.35

3.90 ≤ VTS <4.30

L



1 4.00 ≤ VTS <4.10

3.00 ≤ VTS <3.50

2.50 ≤ VTS <3.00

2.25 ≤ VTS <2.70

2.00 ≤ VTS <2.40

1.80 ≤ VTS <2.00

2 4.10 ≤ VTS <4.20

3.50 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.00 ≤ VTS <3.50

2.70 ≤ VTS <3.15

2.40 ≤ VTS <2.80

2.00 ≤ VTS <2.50

3 4.20 ≤ VTS <4.30

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.20

3.50 ≤ VTS <4.00

3.15 ≤ VTS <3.60

2.80 ≤ VTS <3.20

2.50 ≤ VTS <3.00

4 4.30 ≤ VTS <4.40

4.20 ≤ VTS <4.30

4.00 ≤ VTS <4.25

3.60 ≤ VTS <3.90

3.20 ≤ VTS <3.60

3.00 ≤ VTS <3.50

H


TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio)0: No supply 1: 7.5% 2: 7.5% 3: 7.5% 4: 15% 5: 100%

Toner density control table has been changed for B047/B048 copiers.

DEVELOPMENT

SM 2-5 B047/B048

Det

aile

dD

escr

ipti

on

s

Recovery from Toner End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), themain motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During the first 30seconds, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3.The main motor continues to rotate the development unit for another 30 seconds.Then copies can be made.

If the TS level does not reach 3, the CPU stops the machine and displays the tonerend condition. This prevents the operator from resetting the toner end condition bysimply opening and closing original feed unit.

CLEANING

B047/B048 2-6 SM

2.6 CLEANING

2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION

B047/B048 copiers have a used toner overflow sensor [A] and a used toner coverswitch [B].

When the used toner overflow sensor detects that the used toner tank is full, theoverflow indicator begins blinking on the operation panel. 30 more meters (A1/Dsize: 50 copies, SP51) can be copied. After that, the used toner overflow indicatorstays ON, and the machine will not operate.

The used toner cover switch detects when the used toner cover is open. “Dooropen” is displayed on the operation panel, and the start key is disabled.

B047D101.WMF

[A]

[B]


SM 2-7 B047/B048

Det

aile

dD

escr

ipti

on

s

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW

Two thermofuses [A] (184°C, 192°C) keep the fusing unit from overheating.

Two thin-film thermistors measure the hot roller and pressure roller’s temperature.

The hot roller is a thin-shell, Teflon coated roller. The thinner roller allows a much-shorter warm-up time. However, extra care should be taken while working aroundthe hot roller. It is very easy to damage.

Like the A163/A251/A252 copiers, if the fusing temperature is lower than 60°Cwhen the main switch is turned on, the machine assumes that it has not been usedrecently, and the main motor must rotate to generate the necessary triboelectriccharge on the toner and developer.

In the A163/A251/A252 copiers, the main motor begins rotating immediately.However, the B047/B048 copiers have a thin shell hot roller and a contactthermistor. When cold, the thermistor is hard and might damage the roller. Themachine waits until the hot roller temperature reaches 80°C. At that temperaturethe thermistor softens and the hot roller can rotate safely.

Except for the differences listed above, the B047/B048 copiers are identical to theA251 and A252 copiers. Please refer to A163/A251/A252 copier service manual foradditional details.

B047D102.WMF

[A]


B047/B048 2-8 SM

2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Hot Roller Temperature Control

The relationship between the hot roller and pressure roller temperatures has beenchanged due to the thin-shell, Teflon coated roller.

~60

142

150

160

170

180

190

198

63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120~

Pressure Rol ler Temp. (°C)

Hot Rol ler Temp. (°C)

Mode 8

Mode 7

Mode 6

Mode 5

Mode 4

Mode 3

Mode 2

Mode 1

185

198

110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145

Operat ing Temperature

Lower Limit

180

190

Mode 8

Lower Limit

B047D001.WMF

ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION)

SM 2-9 B047/B048

Det

aile

dD

escr

ipti

on

s

2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THEDESTINATION)

In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, fieldtechnicians need to understand the new operation modes, and must be able toconfigure the machine for the customer’s specific environment/requirements. Thissection lists all the differences between the Energy Star compliant machines andthe previous models.

Mode Non-Energy Star Energy Star

Auto Off Mode Not available

Starts timing once the last copy job iscomplete. When the specified time haspassed, the copier turns off.The time can be adjusted from 1 to 240minutes.Default: 30 minutes


*15Auto Shut-off TimeSetting


*33AOF Auto off enable. 0: Disable

1: Enable

R A

CN

102

-A3

-B13

VA

A [

24]

Pow

er R

elay

[!

24]

B047D002.WMF

INSTALLATION


SM 3-1 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

3. INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 15°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)


3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to directsunlight).

4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour.

5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)

6. If the location is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows:a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to

high, or vice versa.b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in

the summer.c) Where it will not be directly exposed to heat.

7. Avoid exposure to corrosive gases.

8. Avoid installing anywhere higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.


10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent, strongvibration.


B047/B048 3-2 SM

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back: 600 mm (24 in)

3. Right: 600 mm (24 in)

4. Left: 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level



B047I505.WMF

Back 600 mm

Right600 mm

Front 1,000 mm

Left600 mm


SM 3-3 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

Important:The machine must be installed in a building/facility equipped with a protectivedevice such as a circuit breaker, as the machine relies on such devices forprotection against over-current and short circuits.

1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 HzMore than 12 A (for U.S.A. version)

220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 HzMore than 7 A (for European version)

2. Permissible VoltageFluctuation:

±10%


NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.2) Avoid multi-wiring.


B047/B048 3-4 SM


3.2.1 COPIER

Accessory Check


- B048 copier -

Original Guides........................................................................ 6 pcs

Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc

Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc

Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc

Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc

Original Guide Wire ................................................................. 1 pc

- B047 copier -

Guide Wires............................................................................. 2 pcs

Copy Tray ................................................................................ 1 pc

Copy Guide.............................................................................. 1 pc

Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc

Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc

Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc

Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc


SM 3-5 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]and the manual feed table [B] for installation.

1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feedtable [B].

2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

B047I024.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]


B047/B048 3-6 SM

NOTE: The installation procedures are not shipped with the copier, always bringthis manual with you.

!CAUTION1. Unplug the power cord before performing the following procedures.2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make

sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takesat least two people to lift the copier safely.

4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as youplace the copier onto the table or roll feeder.

NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will bereused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.

1. For either the table or the roll feeder, lower the feet [A] (table: 2 feet, roll feeder:4 feet) so that it does not move while the copier is being installed.

2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] or roll feeder [D] (Place the copier feet [E]into the table holes [F]).

!WARNINGThe copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard maycause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the table.

B047I500.WMF

B048I502.WMF

[B]

[F]

[C]

[A]

[F]

[E]

- B047 model -

[B]

[A][D]

[F]

[F]

[E]

- B048 model -


SM 3-7 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n3. Remove all the tape strips [A] as shown.

4. Open the original feed unit [B].

5. Remove the cushion [C] and close the original feed unit.

6. Release the lock levers [D] and open the paper path section [E].

7. Remove the right upper cover [F] (2 screws).

8. Remove the drum protection sheet [G] and remove the screw [H]. This appliescleaning blade pressure to the drum.NOTE: Be sure to remove the protective sheet before removing the pressure

screw. Otherwise, the cleaning blade will clamp the sheet to the drum,and the drum may be damaged.

9. Open the fusing exit section [I]. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [J] andthe protection sheet [K].

10. Remove two strips of shipping tape [L]. Close the paper path section and fusingexit section.

B047I001.WMF B047I103.WMF

B047I105.WMF

B047I104.WMF

[A]

[A]

[I]

[L][K]

[E]

[B][C]

[L]

[J]

[F]

[H]

[J]

[D]

[G]

[D]


B047/B048 3-8 SM

11. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover[C]. Remove the sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of thedeveloper [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.NOTE: Close the paper path section before opening the toner supply cover. If

the paper path section is open, the toner supply cover could fall off.


B047I503.WMF

B047I504.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]


SM 3-9 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60°°°°C when the main switch isturned on, the main motor must rotate to generate a triboelectriccharge on the developer and toner. However, to prevent damage tothe hot roller, the main motor will wait until the hot roller’stemperature reaches 80°°°°C before rotating. This may take a fewminutes.In this case, it is not necessary to use the SP mode to load thedeveloper. Skip steps 13 to 16. After the developer is loaded from thedevelopment entrance, turn off the main switch to stop the mainmotor. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer.

13. To begin main motor rotation, enter the SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode by pressingthe following keys on the operation panel:Clear Mode key [A]+ key [B]+ key [B]Clear/Stop key [C]Clear/Stop key [C] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.

14. After 3 seconds, the wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SPINPUT/OUTPUT mode).

15. Use the + and – keys [D] to select 23, then press the RF Select key [E]. Themain motor will begin rotating.

16. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor once the developer is loadedfrom the development entrance. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer into thedevelopment unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the ClearModes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

B435I508.WMF

[C]

[E]

[A]

[B][D]


B047/B048 3-10 SM

17. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear key [A]+ key [B]– key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.

18. After 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SPmode).

19. Using the + and – keys, select 36. Enter “1” by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F]

This begins the developer initialization. Initialization takes about fiveminutes, after which the copier will automatically return to the normaloperation mode.

B435I508.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B][C][E]


SM 3-11 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

20. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.1) Shake the cartridge 5 to 10 times and insert it into the toner hopper.2) Peel off the green tape [B] from right to left to expose the clear tape and

toner supply holes.3) Rotate the knob [C] of the cartridge clockwise until it stops.

B047I507.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]


B047/B048 3-12 SM

B048 copier only (step 21)

21. Install the original guides [A] and original guide wire [B].

B047 copier only (step 22 and 23)

22. Attach the guide wires [C] to the copy tray [D].

23. Install the copy tray [D] and copy guide [E].

Both copiers (step 24 and 25)



26. Install the optional roll feeder. (Refer to the Roll Feeder 1 and 2 Installationprocedures)NOTE: While the roll feeder is optional for the B047, it is required for the B048.

You must install a roll feeder for the B048 to function properly.

B047I506.WMF

B047I509.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[A]


SM 3-13 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.2.2 TABLE (B439)

Accessory Check


Top Plate ................................................................................ 1

Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1

Right Side Plate ...................................................................... 1

Middle Plate ............................................................................ 1

Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1

Screws with Spring Washers – M4x8 .....................................14


B047/B048 3-14 SM

1. Loosely install the top plate [A], left [B], and right side plate [C] (6 screws).

2. Turn the table up-side down. Be sure to rotate it as shown in the illustration.

3. Install the middle plate [D] and rear cover [E] (4 screws each).

4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [F] are completely flat.

5. Turn the table right-side up.

B439I551.WMF

B439I500.WMF

[E]

[C]

[A]

[D][B]

[A]

[C]

[F]

[B]


SM 3-15 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (B440)

Accessory CheckCheck the accessories and their quantities against the following list:

Copy Tray Stay........................................................................ 1

Copy Tray Support................................................................... 1

Copy Tray Guides.................................................................... 2

Copy Tray Sheets (with rubber pads) ...................................... 3

Rear Copy Trays...................................................................... 3

Copy Tray Stoppers................................................................. 2

Stepped Screws – M4.............................................................. 2

Screws with Flat Washers – M4x6........................................... 6

Tray Sheet Guides................................................................... 3

Rear Copy Tray Sheets (no rubber pads)................................ 3

NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the B048 copier. When the copy tray isinstalled on the copier, the roll feeder (B435/B436) is required.


B047/B048 3-16 SM

1. Place the copy tray stay [A] under the copy tray as shown.

2. Adhere the copy tray sheets (the Mylar strips with rubber pads) [B] to thetable’s middle plate [C]. Make sure the center copy tray sheets is positionedbetween the screw holes [D] on the copy tray as shown. The left and right copytray sheets should be positioned over the screw holes.

3. Lift the copy tray stay and install the two stepped screws [E] to the left and rightside plates [F, G]. After the screws are in place, hook the copy tray stay [A] onthe screws. Then secure it to the left and right side plates (2 screws for each:M4x6 with flat washers).NOTE: Be careful when installing the copy tray stay. Do not scratch the

surface of the table.

4. Install the copy tray support [H] (2 screws: M4x6 with flat washers).

B440I117.WMF

B440I118.WMF

B440I119.WMFB440I121.WMF

[A]

[H]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[E]

[G]

[F]


SM 3-17 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n5. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws).

6. Attach the rear copy tray sheets [B] and the tray sheet guides [C] to the rearcover as shown.

7. Install the rear cover (2 screws).


B440I115.WMF

B440I116.WMF

[A]

[C]

0±2mm

[B]

10±5mm 0±5mm10±5mm0±2mm

[C]


B047/B048 3-18 SM

8. Hook the rear copy trays [A] onto the copy tray stay [B].

9. Attach the copy tray stoppers [C] onto the bottom of the middle plate [D].

B440I123.WMF

B440I120.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C] [D]

60±10mm

80±10mm

60±10mm


SM 3-19 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 AND 2 (B435/B436)

Accessory Check


Harness Covers....................................................................... 2 pcs

Ground Plates.......................................................................... 2 pcs

Roll Feeder Drive Board .......................................................... 1 pc

Left Joint Bracket..................................................................... 1 pc

Right Joint Bracket................................................................... 1 pc

Screws – M4x8 (Blue).............................................................. 4 pcs

Screws – M4x8 (Silver)............................................................10 pcs

Screws with Flat Washers – M4x10......................................... 2 pcs

Screw with a Spring Washer – M4x8 ....................................... 1 pc

Screws with Flat Washers – M3x6........................................... 2 pcs

Left Joint Cover........................................................................ 1 pc

Right Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc

Harness Clamp........................................................................ 2 pcs

Paper Holder1 Roll ................................................................................... 2 pcs2 Roll ................................................................................... 4 pcs

Guide Plate.............................................................................. 1 pc

Front Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc

Cutter Blade Caution Decal (-27 only) ..................................... 1 pc

Joint Harness........................................................................... 1 pc


B047/B048 3-20 SM

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]and the manual feed table [B] for installation.

1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feedtable [B].

2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

B047I024.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]


SM 3-21 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

!CAUTION1. Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following

procedure.2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make

sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takesat least two people to lift the copier safely.

4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as youplace the copier onto the roll feeder.

1. Lower the feet [A] (4 feet) so that the roll feeder [B] does not move while thecopier [C] is being installed.

!CAUTIONDo not open the paper tray until the copier is placed on top of the rollfeeder. The paper tray drawer is very heavy. Without the copier weight tohold it down, the roll feeder will fall over. The tray is shipped with a safetylatch holding the drawer shut.

2. Place the copier on the roll feeder. Fit the copier feet [D] into the roll feederholes [E].

!WARNINGThe copier is not attached to the roll feeder. Pushing the copier too hardmay cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the roll feeder.

B436I102.WMF

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[E]

[E]


B047/B048 3-22 SM

3. Release the lock lever [A] and open the copier paper path section [B].

4. Remove the copier’s left lower cover [C] (2 screws), lower right front cover [D](2 screws), lower right middle cover [E], and toner collection bottle [F] (1connector).

B435I506.WMF

B435I507.WMF

[C]

[D][E]

[F]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[A]


SM 3-23 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

5. Pull out the paper tray [A] and install the left [B] and right [C] joint brackets (2screws each: blue).

6. Remove the paper tray stopper [D] (1 screw).NOTE: After the copier has been placed on the roll feeder, the paper tray can

be pulled out and the paper tray stopper can be removed.

7. If necessary, adhere the appropriate language cutter blade caution decal [E]over the English decal on the paper tray as shown.

B435I101.WMFB435I105.WMF

B435I104.WMF

B435I127.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[E]

[D]


B047/B048 3-24 SM

8. Remove the roll feeder’s rear cover [A] (6 screws).

9. Remove the copier’s rear cover [B] (2 screws).

10. Remove the small caps [C] from the copier’s rear cover using cutting pliers.

11. Install the roll feeder drive board [D].

12. Connect the following harness connectors as shown.DC harness [E] — Roll Feeder Drive boardJoint harness [F] — Roll Feeder Drive board


B435I124.WMF


[B]

[A]

[B]

[C][F]

[D]

[D]

[E]

[I]

[H]

[G]


SM 3-25 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

Joint harness [G] — Copier Main Control board (3 clamps)AC harness [H] — AC Drive board [I]

13. Install the grounding plates [A] (1 screw for each: M4x8).

14. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw: M4x8 with a spring washer) to thecopier.NOTE: To ensure proper grounding, tighten the ground wire’s screws until the

spring washer is completely flat.

15. Install the harness covers [C] (1 screw for each: M4x10 with flat washers).NOTE: Fold the harness covers around the harness, then attach with a single

screw.

16. Reinstall the rear cover of the roll feeder (6 screws).

17. Clamp the power cord to the rear cover of the roll feeder (2 screws: M4x8).

18. Put back the copier’s rear cover.

B435I107.WMF

B435I109.WMF

B435I125.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[A]

[C]


B047/B048 3-26 SM

19. Hook the guide plate [A] on the copier and then secure it (2screws: M4x8).

20. Install the front joint cover [B] (2 screws: M3x6 with flat washers).

21. Reassemble the copier.

22. Install the left and right joint covers [C, D] (2 screws for each: M4x8 each).

[A]

[B]

[C, D]


SM 3-27 B047/B048

Inst

alla

tio

n

LengthTemperature

300 PRG.NO. 1100 PRG.

NO.NORMAL XX 42 XX 45


24. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:Clear Modes key [A]+ key [B]– key [C]Clear/Stop key [D]Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold it for at least 3 seconds.

25. After 3 seconds, the roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SPmode).

26. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter “1” (B435: 1 roll) or “2” (B436: 2 rolls)by pressing the following keys.Function Select key [E]+ keyRF Select key [F].

27. To set the paper cut length adjustments, input values into SP modes 42 and 45as listed on the decal attached to the right side plate.NOTE: 1) When the values for SP modes 42 and 45 are set, the paper cut

length adjustment values for vellum and film are automaticallyentered (SP modes 43, 44, 46 and 47).

2) In the case of the 2 roll feeder, you must enter values for both the1st and 2nd roll. The value for the 1st roll can only be entered whenthe corresponding indicator [G] is blinking (same for 2nd roll). Usethe Function Select Key to switch between the two rolls.



B435I508.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B][C][E]

[G]


B047/B048 3-28 SM

3.2.5 ROLL CUTTING RAIL (B437)

The installation is identical to that of the A163 copier’s roll cutting rail (A570).Please refer to the A163 service manual for details. The roll cutting rail and the rollfeeder cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-1 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4. SERVICE TABLES

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Service Program Mode Table

1. A “*” before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed bycustomers or sales representative.

2. In the data column, the default value is printed in bold letters.The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (referto page 4-28.).


*1

FusingTemperature 1(Normal)

Selects the fusing temperature forplain paper.

0: Mode 11: Mode 22: Mode 33: Mode 44: Mode 55: Mode 66: Mode 7

*2

FusingTemperature 2(High)

Selects the fusing temperature fortranslucent paper.


*3

FusingTemperature 3(Low)

Selects the fusing temperature fortranslucent film.


*4Copy CountUp/Down

Select weather the user display panelcounts up or down.

0: Up1: Down

*5

Beeper On/Off Turns the beeper on and off. 0: On1: Off2: Turn the beeper offwhen holding the buttondown to rapidly changethe edge margin orpaper length.

*6


Sets the copy time-out. Begins timingwhen a sheet of copy paper has beenmanually fed, or if the Roll Feed Selectkey is pressed. If a copy is not madewithin the specified time limit, the copypaper is ejected.

0: 2 minutes1: 1 minute2: 3 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes

*7

Manual Feed StartTime Setting

Sets the manual feed delay. The timerbegins when the entrance sensordetects the paper’s leading edge.Once the specified time has passed,the registration rollers start rotating.

0: 2 seconds1: 0.7 second2: 1 second3: 3 seconds4: 4 seconds5: 5 seconds

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-2 SM


*8

Leading EdgeIncrease/DecreaseSpeed Setting

This sets the speed at which theleading edge setting increases ordecreases.When the customer holds down the +or – key, there is a brief pause. After aselected number of 0.25 secondintervals (See SP 12), the values beginto change at the selected speed.

Changes every:0: 0.1 second1: 0.50 second2: 0.25 second3: 0.05 second4: 0.02 second

*9

Auto Reset TimeSetting

Sets the delay for the auto reset. Afterfinishing a copy job, the machine willwait the specified amount of time. If noother jobs are begun, it will thenautomatically reset the copy settings toits default values.

0: 2 minutes1: 1 minutes2: 3 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes5: No auto reset

*10

Auto Energy SaverMode

Enables and disables the auto energysaver mode. If enabled, the machinewill automatically go into energy savermode after it auto resets.

0: No1: Auto Energy Saver

Mode

*11

Screen MessageSetting

Selects one of the options indicated onthe display in the energy saver mode.

0: None1: Pre-HEAt2: Hello i lovE yoU3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 94: SLEEPinG5: HavE A Good dAy.

*12

Leading EdgeIncrease/DecreaseAdjustmentPreliminary Interval

When the user hold downs the + or –key to change the leading edgemargin, print number or paper length,there is a pause before the valuesbegin to change rapidly.This paused is measured in 0.25second intervals.

0: 3 intervals1: 1 intervals2: 2 intervals3: 10 intervals

*13

Original Feed OutWaiting TimeSetting

Sets the original time-out. The timerbegins when an original is placed onthe original table in manual feed mode(B048 copiers only). After the selectedtime, the original is automaticallyejected.

0: 2 minutes1: 1 minute2: 3 minutes3: 4 minutes4: 5 minutes5: No auto feed out

*14

Original Feed StartTime Setting

Sets the delay between when theoriginal entrance sensor or originalrear sensor is actuated, and when theoriginal feed roller begins rotating(B048 copier only).

0: 1 second1: 2 seconds2: 3 seconds3: 4 seconds4: 5 seconds5: 6 seconds6: 7 seconds

*15Auto Shut-off TimeSetting


*16

Original Hold Mode After original scanning is finished, theoriginal exit roller stops beforecompletely feeding out the original.This prevents the original from fallingonto the floor after scanning.The original is fed out when the !key is pressed or when the nextoriginal is inserted into the rear feed.(B048 copier only).

0: No1: Original Hold mode

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-3 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


*17

Length SizeMagnification

Adjusts the speed of the original feedmotor (B048 copier only).The setting can be changed by the keyoperation.

–1.0 ← 0.0 → 1.0Shorter Longer

*18

Semi-synchro CutOriginal ScanningMode

Sets the cutting method for semi-synchro cut mode (B047 copiers only).When using the default method, theuser must manually press the rollpaper cut key as the trailing edge ofthe original passes the table’s edge.When using the alternate method, theuser feeds the original once, and theoriginal length is measured. The userthen feeds the original a second time,and it is scanned and copied. The copyis automatically cut to the appropriatelength.

0: Pressing the rollpaper cut key

1: Inserting the originalagain

*19

Synchro-cut LengthAdjustment

Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro cut mode (B047 copier).Adjusts the cut length in the synchrocut, preset cut, and variable cut modes(B048 copier). The setting can bechanged by a key operation.

–25 ← 0 → 25Shorter Longer1 mm/step

*20

Paper LengthCount Up/DownSetting

Determines weather the paper lengthcycles down (to smaller sizes) or up (tolarger sizes) when the preset cut key ispressed.

0: Down1: Up

*21

Paper LengthUp/Down SpeedSetting

This sets the speed at which the paperlength setting increases or decreases.When the customer holds down the +or – key, there is a brief pause. After aselected number of 0.25 secondintervals (See SP12), the values beginto change at the selected speed.

0: 0.10 second1: 0.5 second2: 0.25 second3: 0.05 second4: 0.02 second5: 0.01 second

*22Fixed Paper SizePattern Setting

Selects the fixed paper size patternchosen when the “Preset Cut” key ispressed.

Refer to page 4-24.

*23to

*32


Up to 10 different paper size can bestored in SPs 23 to 32. If “19” isselected in SP No. 22, these valuesare used when the “Preset Cut” key ispressed.

UdEF: Undefined

*33AOF Auto off enable. 0: Disable

1: Enable

*34Start Key Enable Select whether the start key can be

used as a start trigger.0: Disable1: Enable

35All Indicators ON Turns ON all indicators on the

operation panel when the Roll FeedSelect key is pressed.

0: No1: All indicators on

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-4 SM

ID level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Default ID level 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 — —Light Sensor Output 0.9 0.9 0.88 0.84 0.8 0.8 0.8Development Bias 160 140 120 120 120 80 60


36

New DeveloperInitialization

Carries out the new developerinitialization for 5 minutes. Themachine counts down the remainingtime on the display. After theinitialization, the machine automaticallyadjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 ±0.1 V. During the toner sensoradjustment, “Adj” is displayed. Whenthe adjustment is completed, themachine automatically returns tonormal operating mode.

If the initialization iscanceled before returningto the normal operatingmode, do it again from thebeginning. If the machinefails to adjust the tonersensor output, “E = 11” isdisplayed.

Sets the range of the ID density controlto give finer control over darkerimages. Default level 3 shifts to new IDlevel 7 (see the chart for the newlevels). ID level 8 to 14 cannot beshifted.

The light sensor output anddevelopment bias will change asfollows:

0: Standard Density1: Darker Image Density

*37

Darker ImageDensity

38

Release FusingUnit Service Call

Recovers from the fusing unit SCcondition. After it has been recovered,the machine returns to its initial (poweron) condition.

0: Release SC1: SC condition

39 Not Used

40

Roll FeederIdentification

Sets up the installed roll feeder.

When this value is changed, thesettings in SP42 and SP45 are set to0. These SPs then update the SPslinked to them. SP42 updates SP43and SP44. SP45 updates SP46 andSP47. Each SP mode setting (SP43,44, 45, and 47) can be changedindependently in the appropriate SPmode.

0: No1: Roll Feeder Installed

(1 roll)2: Roll Feeder Installed

(2 rolls)

41Roll Feeder SpeedSetting(Factory Use)

Adjusts the roll paper’s feed speed. 0: Standard–50 ← 0 → 50Faster Slower

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-5 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les

Inch versions Meter versionsSP42 X SP42 XSP43 X SP43 X – 0.4SP44 X + 0.5 SP44 X + 0.5


42

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(300 mm, PlainPaper)

Adjusts the cutting length of 300 mm inthe plain paper mode.

When this value is changed, the valuesfor SP43 and SP44 are automaticallychanged according to the followingtable:

If the settings in SP43 or SP44 exceedthe maximum and/or minimum values,the maximum or minimum values areused instead.

Note:The value for the 1st roll feed can onlybe input when the correspondingindicator is blinking (same for 2nd rollfeed). Use the Function Select Key toswitch between the two indicators.

43

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(300 mm,Translucent Paper)

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mmin the translucent paper mode.


44

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(300 mm,translucent Film)

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mmin the translucent film mode.


0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mmLonger Shorter

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-6 SM

Inch versions Meter versionsSP45 X SP45 XSP46 X – 1.0 SP46 X – 2.4SP47 X + 0.8 SP47 X + 0.8


45

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(1,100 mm, PlainPaper)

Adjusts the cutting length of 1,100 mmin the plain paper mode.

When this value is changed, the valuesfor SP46 and SP47 are automaticallychanged according to the followingtable:

If the settings in SP46 or SP47 exceedthe maximum and/or minimum values,the maximum or minimum values areused instead.


46

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(1,100 mm,Translucent Paper)

To adjust the cutting length of 1,100mm in the translucent paper mode.


47

Roll Feeder CuttingLength Adjustment(1,100 mm,Translucent Film)

To adjust the cutting length of 1,100mm in the translucent film mode.


0: Standard–50 ← 0 → 50 mmLonger Shorter

48Semi-synchro-cutLength Adjustment

Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro cut mode (B047 copier only).

–10 ← 0 → 10Shorter Longer0.1 %/step

49


Changes the main motor speed. 0: Standard–9 ← 0 → 11Slower Faster

When making longcopies, if the main motorspeed is incorrect, rJ98 orrJ99 error messages willbe displayed. Use this SPto make the necessaryadjustments.

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-7 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


50

Toner EndDetection Setting

Determines the maximum number ofcopies (when A1 paper is used) thatcan be made after the toner near endcondition has been detected.

0: 27 sheets1: 9 sheets2: 18 sheets3: 36 sheets

51

Toner OverflowDetection Setting

Determines the maximum copy lengththat can be made after the toner nearoverflow condition has been detected.

0: 30 m1: 6 m2: 53 m3: 77 m4: 100 m5: 142 m

52

Used TonerCounter

Indicates the maximum copy lengththat can be made before the usedtoner near overflow condition istriggered

This counter is automatically clearedwhen the toner overflow condition iscleared after emptying the used tonerin the bottle.

tF=XX,XXX (Beeper)

53

Used TonerCounter Clear

Manually clear the used toner counter. 0: Full toner condition is not detected

1: Full toner condition is detected.

To clear the counter, input“0” even if “0” is alreadyindicated.

54

DeveloperWarm-up Setting

Sets the developer agitation time.If the fusing temperature is lower than60°C when the main switch is turnedon, the main motor rotates for the setamount of time, generating atriboelectric charge on the developerand toner.

0: 50 seconds1: 2 minute2: 3 minute3: None

55

Paper Length LimitSetting

Determines the maximum paperlength.

Note:If paper longer than 2,000 mm is used,you may experience skewed orcreased copies, poor fusing, ordamage to the original.

(In mm mode)0: 3,000 mm1: 3,600 mm2: 5,200 mm3: 6,800 mm4: 8,400 mm5: 9,999 mm

(In inch mode)0: 118.0 inch1: 160.0 inch2: 240.0 inch3: 320.0 inch4: 400.0 inch5: 480.0 inch

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-8 SM


56

Copy Number LimitSetting

Determines the maximum number ofcopies. The default settings for theB047 and B048 copiers are different.

0: 99 sheets (B047)1: 10 sheets (B048)2: 20 sheets3: 30 sheets4: 40 sheets5: 50 sheets6: 60 sheets7: 70 sheets8: 80 sheets9: 90 sheets

57

Emergency StopKey FunctionSetting

Determines how the emergency stopkey functions.

When set to 0, the emergency stop keyonly stops the original drive.

When set to 1, it stops the originaldrive, main motor drive, and roll feeddrive (B048 copier only).

When a roll runs out of paper, if a layerof white paper remains wrappedaround the core, the machine mightnot detect the paper end condition.This can cause a noise or a WrongPaper Feed error. If this SP is set to 1,you can use the emergency stop keyto recover from this error.

0: Only original drive1: Original, main motor,

roll feed drives.

58

Repeat CopyLength Limit Setting

Determines the maximum copy lengthfor multiple copies (B048 copier only).

0: 1,200 mm/48 inch1: The maximum paper

length determined by SP55.

59Misfeed SpecialRecovery Mode

While the Emergency Stop key is helddown, power is still supplied to themain motor and registration clutch.

0: No1: Misfeed Special

Recovery Mode

60

Fixed Paper LengthSpecial Mode

Adjusts the size of the selected presetpaper size.Each time the +/– keys are pressedwhile holding down the Preset Cut key,the preset paper size is adjusted bythe amount selected in SP 61.

0: Normal1: Fixed Paper Length

Special Mode

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-9 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


61

Fixed Paper LengthSpecial Mode

Selects the interval of each step forSP60.

(In mm mode)0: 100 mm1: 50 mm2: 60 mm3: 120 mm4: 200 mm5: 240 mm6: 250 mm7: 500 mm8: 600 mm

(In inch mode)0: 10.0 inch1: 5.0 inch2: 6.0 inch3: 12.0 inch4: 20.0 inch5: 24.0 inch6: 25.0 inch7: 50.0 inch8: 60.0 inch

62

Special TonerSupply Mode

In the energy saver mode, 10% tonersupply is done while the “EmergencyStop” key is pressed. Toner sensorvoltage is displayed on the “PaperLength” indicator. If the voltage islower than 1 V, toner is not supplied.

0: No1: Special Toner Supply

Mode

63 Not Used

64

SP Mode DisplaySpeed Setting

Sets the display speed. 0: 300 ms/letter1: 100 ms/letter2: 200 ms/letter3: 400 ms/letter4: 500 ms/letter

65

ROM VersionDisplay

Indicates the ROM version. Example: vEr_1994_06_06_01

Year Date

Month

Suffix0: No, 1: A, 2: B,3: C … 9: J

Internal Use Only

66

RAM AbnormalCondition Check

The value is set based on the RAMcheck. Shows the condition of theback-up RAM.

The condition of the RAMis checked when themachine is powered on.0: Normal1: Abnormal

67Machine OperationCounter

Displays the total time (hours) that themachine has been in operation (totaltime the motor has been rotating).

dc = X,XXX

68 Not Used

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-10 SM


69Total Copy Length/Number Display(Feet)

Displays the total copy length in feet. SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX

70to75

Total CopyLength/NumberDisplay

Displays the total copy length/numberaccording to the following units.

SP70 = YardSP71 = meterSP72 = 100 inchesSP73 = 50 inchesSP74 = A1 length (594 mm)SP75 = sheet (any size)

SP70: t0 = XXX,XXXSP71: t1 = XXX,XXXSP72: t2 = XXX,XXXSP73: t3 = XXX,XXXSP74: t4 = XXX,XXXSP75: t5 = XXX,XXX

76

OPC Counter Displays the total length of copies (inmeters) on the current OPC drum.

dO = XX,XXXThis counter should becleared when the OPCdrum is replaced.(SP#-1)

77

Developer CounterDisplay

Displays the total length of copies (inmeters) on the current developer.

dE = XX,XXXThis counter isautomatically clearedwhen new developer isinitialized.

78

Toner CounterDisplay

Displays the total length of copies (inmeters) on the current toner cartridge

dT = XX,XXXThis counter isautomatically clearedwhen a new tonercartridge is installed.

79

Toner Supply LevelIndication

Indicates the present toner sensorlevel.

dL = ab - - ca: Toner density setting

n, H, Lb: TS level

0 ~ 5c: Copy number step

0: ~ 30 m1: ~ 60 m3: ~ 90 m4: ~ 120 m5: ~ 150 m6: 150 m ~

80

DeveloperInitializationNumber Counter

Displays the total number of times thedeveloper has been initialized (SP36).Also displays the value of thedeveloper counter (SP77) when thelast developer initialization wasperformed.

dnF = XX (total number of developerinitializations)

Hde = XX,XXX (developer counter at the last developer initialization

81

Toner End NumberCounter

Displays the total number of toner endconditions (dtE). Also, displays thetoner counter (SP78) at the last tonerend condition (Hdt).

dtE = XXHdt = XX,XXX

82

Toner Near EndCounter

Displays the total number of toner nearend conditions (dtn). Also, displays thetoner counter (SP78) when the lasttoner end condition was triggered(Hdt).

dtn = XXHdt = XX,XXX

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-11 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


83Roll Feed SpeedAdjustment(translucent paper)

Adjust the roll feed speed fortranslucent paper.

–50.0 ← 0 → 50.010 steps = 0.09%

84Roll Feed SpeedAdjustment (film)

Adjust the roll feed speed for film. –50.0 ← 0 → 50.010 steps = 0.09%

85


Displays the total number of jams bylocation.

Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)J1 ∼∼∼∼ J8 (initial jam)J10 ∼∼∼∼ J45 (original jam)J51 ∼∼∼∼ J72 (copy paper

jam)J80 ∼∼∼∼ J99 (roll feeder

paper jam)

86

Misfeed RecordDisplay

Displays the locations of the last fivemisfeeds. Locations are displayed oneat a time.

J1 = XX (Last jam)↓

J2 = XX (1 before the last jam)

↓J3 = XX (2 before the

last jam)↓

J4 = XX (3 before the last jam)

↓J5 = XX (4 before the

last jam)↓

Beeper(XX = Jam Location)

87Preset CutAdjustment (3,000mm, plain paper)

Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. –20 ← 0 → 201 step = 1 mm

88

Preset CutAdjustment (3,000mm, translucentpaper)


89Preset CutAdjustment (3,000mm, film)


90Number of ServiceCall by Location

Displays the total number of servicecalls (SC) and lists the SCs bylocation.

Et = X,XXX (total SCs)E1 ∼∼∼∼ E15 (each SC)

91

Service CallRecords

Displays the last five service calls. SCsare displayed one at a time.

E1 = XX (The last SC Xcode)

E2 = XX (1 before the last SC code)




Beeper (XX = SC code)92to99

Not Used

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-12 SM


-1

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from theRAM.To clear the memory, input the numberof the item you want to delete, thenpress the " key.

Note:If all the memory is cleared (if anumber from 20 to 28 is selected), youmust reenter the roll cutter settingsfrom the decal attached inside theupper right cover.Please refer to page 4-14 for thedefault settings for each destination.(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.)

0: Not Used1: Machine Operation

(The memory for SP67)

2: Copy Length Counter(SP69 to 75)

3: OPC Counter (SP76)4: Developer Counter

(SP77) (*Note1)/Developer Initialization Number (SP80)

5: Toner Counter (SP78)/Toner End Number (SP81)/Toner Near End Number (SP82)

6: Counter for toner density step. (*Note2)

7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53.

8: SC Counter(SP90 to 91)

9: Jam Counter(SP85 to 86)

10: Change the settings tothe Japan version

11: Change the settings tothe U.S.A. version

12: Change the settings tothe Europe version

13: Change the settings tothe Asia version

14: Change the settings tothe NRG version

15: Change the settings toother version 1



18: Not Used19: Not Used20: Clear all the memory

and change the settings to the Japanese version

*Note1:This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163manual).

*Note2:For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after thedeveloper initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and after150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-13 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-1

RAM Clear Clears selected data items from theRAM.To clear the memory, input the numberof the item you want to delete, thenpress the " key.

Note:If all the memory is cleared (if anumber from 20 to 28 is selected), youmust reenter the roll cutter settingsfrom the decal attached inside theupper right cover.Please refer to page 4-25 for thedefault settings for each destination.(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.)

21: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the U.S.A. version

22: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Europeversion

23: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Asia version

24: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the NRG version

25: Clear all the memory and change the settings to other Other 1 version



28: Not Used29: Not Used30: Clear all the memory

-2


Selects the unit which the total countercounts by.

0: 1 yard1: 1 m2: 100 inches3: 50 inches4: A1 length (594 mm)5: Sheet (Any size)6: 1 foot

-3Inch/mm Exchange Selects the unit in which the edge

margin and paper length is indicatedby.

0: mm1: Inch

-4 Not Used

-5

RegistrationAdjustment

Adjusts the paper registration for theby-pass feed. When this setting ischanged, the same setting will be setfor SP#-45 (Roll Feeder Registration).

0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mm Advance Delay

-6

Light SensorAdjustment

Change the settings for the lightsensor.

While in this mode, the exposure lampcan be turned ON and OFF using theCopy Media key.

Translucent paper: ONTranslucent Film: OFF

50: Standard0 ← 50 → 99Darker Lighter

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-14 SM


-7Hot RollerTemperatureAdjustment

Change the hot roller temperaturesetting.

0: Standard–9 ← 0 → 9°CDecrease Increase

-8Pressure RollerTemperatureAdjustment

Change the pressure rollertemperature setting.

0: Standard–9 ← 0 → 9°CDecrease Increase

-9

Hot Roller/Pressure RollerTemperatureDisplay

Displays the hot roller temperature andpressure roller temperature.Even after the SP mode is canceled,the temperature will be displayedduring the copy cycle and in standbymodeTo stop this, turn the main switch offand on.

Fu = XXXPr = XXXFu: Hot roller

temperaturePr: Pressure roller

temperatureIf the hot rollertemperature is lower than80°C (pressure rollertemperature is lower than50°C), “LLL” is displayed.If the hot rollertemperature is higher than220°C (pressure rollertemperature is higher than180°C), “HHH” isdisplayed.

-10

Drum ChargeSetting

Determines the drum charge voltage.In this mode, the charge corona can beturned on and off using the CopyMedia key.Translucent paper = ONTranslucent Film = OFF


-11

Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage.In this mode, the grid voltage can beturned on and off using the CopyMedia key.



-12

Transfer CoronaVoltage Setting

Determines the transfer coronavoltage.In this mode, the transfer corona canbe turned on and off using the CopyMedia key.


To facilitate setting SP modes, whenSP#-12 is entered, SP#-13 will beautomatically set to (SP#-12’s value X1.5)


-13

Transfer Voltage atthe Paper’s TrailingEdge

Determines the transfer corona voltageat the paper trailing edge.In this mode, the transfer corona canbe turned on and off using the CopyMedia key.



SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-15 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-14

Separation ACVoltage setting

Determines the AC separation coronavoltage.In this mode, the separation coronacan be turned on and off using theCopy Media key.


To facilitate setting SP modes, whenSP#-14 is entered, SP#-15 will beautomatically set to (SP#-14’s value X1.12).


-15

Separation ACVoltage at thePaper’s LeadingEdge

Determines the AC separation coronavoltage at the paper’s leading edge.In this mode, the separation coronacan be turned on and off using theCopy Media key.



-16

Separation DCVoltage setting

Determines the DC separationcorona’s voltage.In this mode, the separation coronacan be turned on and off using theCopy Media key.


To facilitate setting SP modes, whenSP#-16 is entered, SP#-17 will beautomatically set to (SP#-16’s value X1.5)


-17

Separation DCVoltage at thePaper LeadingEdge

Determines the DC separationcorona’s voltage at the paper leadingedge.In this mode, the separation coronacan be turned on and off using theCopy Media key.



-18to

-19

Not Used

-20

Bias Voltage for theImage Area

Determines the development biasvoltage for the image area.In this mode, the bias voltage can beturned on and off using the CopyMedia key.



SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-16 SM

Copy Length(A4 size) Std. Low High

~ 30m(~ 50 sheets) 4.00V 4.35V 4.00V

~ 60m(~ 100 sheets) 3.50V 4.30V 3.00V

~ 90m(~ 150 sheets) 3.00V 4.25V 2.50V

~ 120m(~ 200 sheets) 2.50V 3.75V 2.25V

~ 150m(~ 250 sheets) 2.25V 3.25V 2.00V

150m ~(251 sheets ~) 2.00V 2.75V 1.80V


-21

Bias Voltage forNon-image AreaSetting

Determines the development biasvoltage for the non-image area.In this mode, the bias voltage can beturned on and off using the CopyMedia key.



-22

Toner DensitySetting

Selects the toner density setting. Thetoner density changes according to thecopy length after the developer isreplaced.

0: Standard1: Low2: High

-23

Toner SupplyPeriods in TonerEnd Condition

Selects the length of time that themachine adds toner after clearing thetoner end condition.

0: 60 s1: 70 s2: 80 s3: 90 s

-24Original Feed MotorSpeed Adjustment

Adjusts the speed of the original feedmotor (B048 copier only).

–50 ← 0 → 50Faster Slower0.030%/step

-27

Original RepeatSkew Check Mode

Used to check skew when printingmultiple copies (B048 only).When using this mode to makemultiple copies, only the first and lastcopies are actually printed. The othercopies are just scanned. By comparingthe two copies, you can check forskew.

Procedure1. Select 1 in this mode.2. Exit from SP mode.3. Select the manual feed and enter

the copy quantity to 3 or more.4. Place the sheet on the manual feed

table and place the original on theoriginal table.

5. After all the copies are made,change SP#-27 to 0 or turn the mainswitch off and on. (This mode will becanceled.)

0: Off1: On

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-17 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-28

Length SizeMagnificationCompensation onLeading Edge

The fusing roller’s speed is slightlyhigher than the drum speed.The speed of the copy paper transportwill increase slightly after the leadingedge of the copy paper enters thefusing unit.To compensate for this, the speed ofthe original feed motor is correctedfrom the leading edge to 183 mm(B048 copier only).

–100 ← 10 → 100Shorter Longer–2.5% +2.5%

-29

RegistrationAdjustment for theRear Feed

Adjusts the paper registration for therear original feed (B048 only).If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this settingis used for the paper registration forthe front original feed as well as therear original feed. In this case, thisadjustment is automatically set for theSP#-5 adjustment.

0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9 mmAdvance Delay

-30

Toner DensitySensor VoltageSetting

Changes the toner density sensorvoltage. Normally, the value isautomatically adjusted when the newdeveloper initialization (SP36) is done.In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL andthe bias voltage for non-image areacan be turned or and off using theCopy Media key.



-31Toner SensorVoltage Display(Last Copy)

Displays the toner sensor outputvoltage for the last copy.

A = X,XX(Beeper)

-32

Toner SensorVoltage Display(Real Time)

Displays the real time toner sensoroutput voltage.In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QLand the bias voltage for non-imageareas can be turned on and off usingthe Copy Media key.


When this SP mode is canceled, thevoltage will be continually displayedduring the copy cycle and in standbymode (the toner sensor output voltage,paper length and copy counter aredisplayed one at a time).To stop this, turn the main switch offand on.

A = X,XX

A = Toner Sensor Voltage

During the stand-bycondition, and copycycling the following datais displayed.

A = X,XX↓

LE = X,XXX↓

CO = XX↓

(Beeper)

LE = Paper Length(ex. 297 mm: LE=0.297

12 inch: LE=0.120)

CO = Copy counter-33to

-34

Not Used

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-18 SM


-35

Synchro-cut LengthAuto Adjustment(297 mm)

Adjusts the original cut length inSynchro Cut mode based on a 297mm sheet (standard length). Insert the297 mm length original five times (thisnumber displayed on the copy numberindicator can be changed : 1 to 10). Ifthe actual original length is differentfrom the standard length, input thefollowing value in the cut lengthindicator before inserting the original:


Then the machine automaticallycalculates the correct value, and thevalue of SP#-38 is changed.

–9.9 ← 0 → 9.91 step = 0.1 mm

-36

Synchro-cut LengthAuto Adjustment(1,189 mm)

Adjusts the original cut length inSynchro Cut mode at 1,189 mm.Insert the 1,189 mm length original fivetimes (this number displayed on thecopy number indicator can bechanged: 1 to 10). If the actual originallength is different from the standardlength, input the following value in thecut length indicator before inserting theoriginal:


Then the machine automaticallycalculates the correction value. Thedata is overwritten on SP#-39.

–50 ← 0 → 501 step = 0.1 mm

-37 Not Used

-38

Synchro-cut LengthManual Adjustment(297 mm)

Adjusts the synchro cut length for a297 mm original. Increasing thenumber will shorten the paper cutlength.

–9.9 ← 0 → 9.91 step = 0.1 mm(This value is over writtenwhen SP#-35 isperformed.)

-39

Synchro-cut LengthManual Adjustment(1,189 mm)

Adjusts the synchro cut length for a1,189 mm original. Increasing thenumber will shorten the paper cutlength.

–50.0 ← 0 → 501 step = 0.1 mm(This value is over writtenwhen SP#-36 isperformed.)

-40to

-44

Not Used

-45

Roll FeederRegistration

Adjusts the paper registration from theroll feederS. When SP#-5 (RegistrationAdjustment) is carried out, this data willbe automatically set with that data.

0: Standard–9.9 ← 0 → 9.9Delay Advance

-50

Forced ReadyCondition(Factory Use)

Forces the machine into the “Ready”condition regardless of the fusingtemperature. This mode cannot beused during the start-up developmentagitation.

0: Normal1: Forced Ready

Condition

-51Lamp Off Mode Fluorescent lamp does not turn on

during the copy cycle.0: Normal1: Lamp off

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-19 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-52

No MisfeedDetection Mode

Ignores jam error signals, except forinitial jams. The setting automaticallyresets to “0” when the main switch isturned off.

0: Normal1: No Misfeed Detection

-53

Free Run Mode The machine caries out copy operationwithout an original. This mode can beused if the optional roll feeder isinstalled and selected paper length ismore than 594 mm.The machine starts operation when theroll feed select key is pressed, andstops when the Emergency Stop key ispressed.

0: Normal1: Next Paper is fed

when the fusing exit sensor is deactivated.

2 ~ 250:Next paper is fed (X-1) seconds after the fusing exit sensor is deactivated.X = Input Number

-54 Not Used

-55

Toner EndRecovery

Sets the process for toner endrecovery. When set to the defaultvalue, the toner density is checked asdescribed in the Toner Density Controlsection 2.4.2.Forced recovery skips this testingprocedure, and just clears the tonerend condition.

0: Normal1: Forced recovery

-56

Used Toner FullCondition Detection

When the toner overflow counter isused, this sets the maximum copylength. Once the counter reaches thisvalue, the used toner full condition istriggered.

0: Toner overflow sensor

1: 840 m2: 480 m3: 1,180 m

-57Roll Feed SpeedCorrection(Plain Paper)

Not used. Do not change this setting 0 ← 5 → 10Slower Faster

-58

Roll Feed SpeedCorrection(Translucent Paper)

The fusing section’s transport speed isslightly faster than the roll feeder’s.This is done to stretch the copy paper.However, due to over-stretching,creases may develop along the trailingedge when the copy paper is longerthan 1,200 mm. To prevent this, theroll feeder’s speed is increased slightlyevery second once the paper feedlength exceeds 1,200 mm. The speedis changed 5 times.

5 in this SP can be used to set the finalroll feed speed equal to the fusingsection’s. Do not change this value inthe field. It is for designer use only.

0 ← 5 → 10Slower Faster

-59Roll Feed SpeedCorrection(Film)

Not used. Do not change this setting. 0 ← 5 → 10Slower Faster

-60


Tracks the amount of time that theexposure sensor is more than 1 Vhigher than the target value.

0 ~ 250:The total time (seconds) that the lampvoltage is more than 1 volt higher than the target value.

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-20 SM


-61


Tracks the amount of time that thefluorescent lamp is at full power duringthe copy cycle.

0 ~ 250:The total time (seconds) that the fluorescent lamp is at full power.

-62

Light SensorVoltage Display(Factory use)

Displays the real time light sensoroutput voltage.In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QLand the bias voltage for non-imageareas can be turned on and off usingthe Copy Media key.


Even if the SP mode is canceled, thevoltage is displayed while copying andwhen in standby mode.To stop this, turn the main switch offand on.

Fd = X,XXFd = Light Sensor Voltage

-63 Factory Use Only

-64Manual FeedAttention Mode 1

Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on themanual feed table before the “SetPaper” indicator comes on.

0: No1: Manual Feed

Attention Mode 1

-65Manual FeedAttention Mode 2

Beeper sounds when the manual tableis ready to accept the next sheet.

0: No1: Manual Feed

Attention Mode 2

-66

Partial copyLeading EdgeMargin

Allows the user to set a larger orsmaller leading edge margin in partialcopy mode.B047 can only increase the margin,while B048 can both increase anddecrease it.

0: No1: A new margin can be

set in the partial copy mode

-67

Toner Full SupplyMode

In the Special Toner Supply mode(SP62), if both the clear/stop key andthe Emergency Stop key are pressed,toner is supplied at 100%.

0: No1: Toner Full Supply

Mode

-68

Combine OriginalsMode

Normally the copy process stops at thetrailing edge of paper or original whichever comes first. If this mode isselected, copy process continues tothe copy’s trailing edge even if theoriginal trailing edge comes first.Use this mode to combine severaloriginals onto a single copy.

0: Normal1: Combine Originals

Mode

-69 Not Used

-70

Synchro-cut RearFeed Mode

Normally, an original cannot beinserted into the rear feeder while inSynchro-cut mode. If 1 is selected, anoriginal can be inserted from the rearside even if Synchro-cut mode is used.This cannot be used with the trailingedge margin function.In this mode, the copy will be about200 mm longer than the original (B048copier only).

0: Normal1: Synchro-cut Rear Feed

Mode

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-21 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les


-71

Cut Length DisplayMode

In semi-synchro cut mode, themachine stores the 1st original cutlength and displays it in the paperlength counter.The paper cut mode will automaticallybe changed to the Preset/Variable cutmode.For the 2nd copy, it is not necessary topress the cut key at the trailing edge ofthe original. Also, before the 2ndoriginal is inserted, the cut length in thecut length counter can be changedusing the “+”/“–” keys. The value canbe changed within the normal range ofthe semi-synchro cut (410 mm ~3,000, 16.5' ~ 118.0') (B047 copieronly).

0: Non-Length Display1: Length Display

-72

Original Feed MotorReturning SpeedSetting

Selects the speed of the original feedmotor in returning original mode. Aslower speeds may be necessary forthinner originals (B048 copier only).

0: 200 mm/s1: 150 mm/s2: 100 mm/s

-73

Roll Feeder StartTiming

Determines the timing of the rollfeeder.The default value begins the roll feederjust after the original registrationsensor is activated.It can also be set to start after thetrailing edge passes the originalentrance sensor.The default value provides a faster firstcopy and increases 1 to 1 CPM.If the emergency stop key is pressedwhile the original is being transportedto the scanning start position, copypaper is cut and fed out of the copier.Whichever setting is selected, the firstcopy and 1 to 1 CPM are withinspecification.

0: Trailing edge is detected.

1: Original insertion

-74

Original TransportMode

Select whether the original istransported from the original table tothe scanning start position directly, orwhether the original is returned to thescanning start position after the trailingedge of the original passes through theoriginal registration sensor (B048copier only).The default setting (= 0) handlescurled originals better. If the setting ischanged from 0 to 1, perform thesynchro-cut length auto adjustment(SP#-35, #-36).

0: Original is transported directly to the start position.

1: Original is returned to the start position after the original passes through the original registration sensor.

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-22 SM


-75

FusingTemperatureRecovery Setting

Determines how the machine recoverswhen the fusing temperature dropsbelow the target value. This is onlytriggered when making multiple copiesusing fusing mode 8 (highesttemperature mode) (B048 copier only).

0: No recovery(The machine simply continues copying, ignoring the fusing temperature.)

1: Stops copying and feeds out the original.

2: Stops copying but the original is not fed out. Copying starts again after the fusing temperature recovers.

-76

Original TransportTorque Down

Sets the operation of the originaltransport torque.

0: No1: Down during transport

forward2: Down during transport

both forward and backwards

SERVICE TOOLS

SM 4-23 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table

The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paperlength indicator (“ON” or “OFF” is displayed). If the selected program number is notused, “NOT” is displayed.

Program No. Sensor/Switch/Signal-1 Registration Sensor-2 Exit Sensor-3 Original Registration Sensor-4 Entrance Sensor

-5 Main Motor LOC Signal(Status is “ON” when the main motor is rotating normally.)

-6 Door Switch(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)

-7 Original Entrance Sensor (B048 copier only)-8 Original Rear Sensor (B048 copier only)-9 Not Used

-10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor-11 Roll Feeder Door Switch-12 Right Cutter Switch-13 Left Cutter Switch-14 Paper End Sensor (1st Roll)-15 Paper End Sensor (2nd Roll)

-16 Exit Cover Open(Status is “ON” when the door is open.)

-17 Used Toner Cover Switch-20 Toner Overflow Sensor-21 Toner Overflow Sensor Connection-24 Total Counter-26 Fusing SC Detection

Output Check Mode Table

Press the " key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of thecomponent is displayed in the paper length indicator.

To turn off the component, press the " key again.

Program No. Electrical Component Note0 Main Motor1 Toner Supply Clutch2 Pick off solenoid3 Registration Clutch4 Total Counter5 Pre-transfer Lamp6 Quenching Lamp7 Fusing Lamp

SERVICE TOOLS

B047/B048 4-24 SM

Program No. Electrical Component Note8 Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)9 Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)10 Main Charge Corona11 Grid Voltage12 Transfer Charge Corona13 Not Used14 Separation Charge Corona15 Exhaust Fan


23 Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for theNon-image Area + Quenching Lamp

24 Original Feed Motor (Forward)(B048 copier only)

25 Original Feed Motor (Reverse)(B048 copier only)

26 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters27 Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note

28 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Forward)29 Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Reverse)30 Roll Feed Clutch 131 Roll Feed Clutch 232 Fusing SC Release

33

Original Feed Motor(Forward and Reverse)(B048 copier only)

Original feed motoroperation changes everytime the roll feed key ispressed.1st time: Forward2nd time: Stop3rd time: Reverse4th time: Stop

34 Main Switch OFF (Energy Star) Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutterswitches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in thepaper length indicator. When the roll feeder is pulled out during thisoperation, the operation will stop.

JAM CODE LIST

B047/B048 4-26 SM

Code Cause of Jam Remarks

dJ45 Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper isfed 3,500 mm.

pJ51 Registration sensor OFF is detected just after starting thecopy process.

pJ52 Registration sensor OFF is detected before starting the rollfeeder again.

B047 only

pJ53 Entrance sensor ON is detected during roll feeding.

pJ55 Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed3,500 mm.

pJ60 Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper leadingedge.

pJ61 Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper leadingedge.

pJ62 Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailingedge.

pJ63 Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper trailingedge.

pJ70 Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge.pJ71 Exit sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge.pJ72 Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge.

rJ80 Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper leadingedge.

rJ81 Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper leadingedge.

rJ90 Paper cutter failurerJ91 Door open during roll feeding

rJ95Roll feeder.Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 600 mm more than themaximum paper length.

rJ98 Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper trailingedge during roll feeding.

rJ99 Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailingedge during roll feeding.

JAM CODE LIST

SM 4-27 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 2971: 3000, 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 2802: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000,

900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 2803: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841,

594, 420, 297, 2804: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 2805: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 2806: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 3647: 3000, 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 2808: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 2809: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880,

841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 280

10: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 28011: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 28012: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500,

1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 280

13: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 280

14: 3000, 2400, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280

15: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 28016: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 28017: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297,

28018: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 28019: The data stored in SP23 to 32

In inch Mode0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.01: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.02: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.03: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.04: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0,

11.05: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 11.0, 10.06: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0,

20.0, 15.0, 11.0, 10.07: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0,

12.0, 11.08: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0,

11.09: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0,

24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0

JAM CODE LIST

B047/B048 4-28 SM

10: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0,12.5, 11.0, 10.0

11: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0

12: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0

13: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0

14: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0,26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 11.0, 10.0

15: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0 11.016: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0,

18.0, 12.0 11.017: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0,

45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0 11.018: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7,

24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.119: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. Japan U.S.A. Europe Asia NRG Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 Other 4#1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1#2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1#4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0#5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2#6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4#9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30#17 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0#19 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0#20 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0#21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5#22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0#33 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1#-2 1 6 1 1 1 1 6 1#-3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0#-6 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

#13, #14, #17: B048 only

SERVICE REMARKS

SM 4-29 B047/B048

Ser

vice

Tab

les

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Service Remark for 220 ∼∼∼∼ 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive boardas shown.

1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on thenoise filter.

2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on thenoise filter.

3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3on the noise filter.

4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal4 on the noise filter

5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 onac drive board.

6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202on ac drive board.

B047S500 WMF

Noise Filter

AC Drive Board

TB201TB202

SERVICE REMARKS

B047/B048 4-30 SM

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly

1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) white connector toTB201 on ac drive board.

2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector toTB202 on ac drive board.

B047S501.WMF

AC Drive Board

TB201TB202


DRUM UNIT

SM 5-1 B047/B048

Rep

lace

men

tan

dA

dju

stm

ent


5.4 DRUM UNIT

5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT


2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).

3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when

removing or reinstalling the drum.

4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.

5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it clockwise as shown.

6. Remove the drum flange [E].

7. Replace the drum with new one.NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the

projection of the gear is on the drum side.2) When re-installing the bearing holders, make sure that the right

bearing holder [G] has two mylar seals [H] attached. The mylar sealsdetermine the position between the drum unit and copier side plate.This also helps to ensure an even image density on the copy.

B047R539.WMF

[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E][D]

[G]

[H]

[B]

FUSING

B047/B048 5-2 SM

5.5 FUSING

5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit.

2. Remove the hot roller thermistor [A] (1 screw, clamps).

5.1.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit.2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [B] (2 screws, 6 clamps, and 2 connectors).

B047R101.WMF

[A]

[B]

FUSING

SM 5-3 B047/B048

Rep

lace

men

tan

dA

dju

stm

ent

5.1.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

!CAUTIONWhen the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start to drivethe fusing section. However, this does not occur immediately. The machinewaits until the hot roller is heated to above 80°°°°C. Keep your hands awayfrom any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.

Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (165°C), Mode 2 (170°C), Mode 3 (175°C), Mode 4(180°C), Mode 5 (190°C), Mode 6 (193°C), Mode 7 (198°C)



3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by theharness.

4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].

5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and waitfor at least 10 minutes.

6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at themiddle of the hot roller.

7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.

9. Reassemble the machine.

B047R538.WMF

[A]

[B]

COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

B047/B048 5-4 SM

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Registration is not within the registration tolerance.Purpose: To maintain proper registration.RegistrationTolerance:

0±3 mm (0±0.12")

Perform: SP#-5 (by-pass feed), SP#-29 (B048 rear original feed), SP#-45 (rollfeed)

How: Change the start timing of the registration roller using SP#-5, SP#-27,and/or SP#-45

1. Make several copies using manual feed or the roll feeder and check theregistration.

2. If the registration is not within the registration tolerance, adjust the registrationusing SP#-5, SP#-29 and/or SP#-45.

NOTE: When SP#-5 is changed, the data in SP#-45 will be automatically set to thesame value. To adjust SP#-45 separately, you must change it afteradjusting SP#-5.

TROUBLESHOOTING

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SM 6-1 B047/B048

Tro

ub

le-

sho

oti

ng

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator ! and SC codesare displayed.SC Codes E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E15, E17 and E18 cannot be cleared bysimply turning the main switch off and on. For safety reasons, you must set SP38from “1” to “0” to clear these.

6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal

DefinitionThe light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.

Points to Check• Exposure lamp• Light sensor• FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -3)• Main board (CN103-7, and CN105-A13, -A14, -B17, -B18)

SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

DefinitionAfter turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot rollerthermistor does not reach 100°C within 4 minutes and 30 seconds.

Points to Check• Fusing thermofuse• Hot roller thermistor• AC drive board• Main board (CN102-A3, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

DefinitionAfter turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot rollerthermistor does not reach 50°C within 3 minutes.

Points to Check• Hot roller thermistor• AC drive board• Fusing thermofuse• Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 11 May, 2001

B047/B048 6-2 SM

SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

DefinitionThe resistance of the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 KΩ.

Points to Check• Hot roller thermistor• Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 MΩ.

Points to Check• Pressure roller thermistor• Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 KΩ.

Points to check• Pressure roller thermistor• Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor exceeds 250°C.

Points to Check• Hot roller thermistor• Fusing thermofuse• AC drive board• Main board (CN102-A1, -B13, -B14)

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SM 6-3 B047/B048

Tro

ub

le-

sho

oti

ng

SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

DefinitionAfter turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot rollerthermistor does not reach the target ready temperature within 12 minutes.

Points to Check• Hot roller thermistor• Fusing lamp• Fusing thermofuse• AC drive board• Main board (CN102-A3, -A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)• AC harness

SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

DefinitionThe toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.NOTE: After initializing the developer, this condition cannot be triggered until at

least 251 copies are made.Points to Check

• Toner density sensor• Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area• Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

DefinitionThe main motor is on, but the main board does not receive a signal from themotor for two seconds.

Points to Check• Main motor• Mechanical interference of the main motor drive• Main board (CN103-1, -2)

SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error

DefinitionThe new developer initialization process cannot adjust the toner density sensorvoltage to its standard range (4.1± 0.1 volts).NOTE: After clearing the SP code, the previous data of SP#-30 will continue to

be used until the next toner initialization.Points to Check

• Toner density sensor• Developer• Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area• Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 11 May, 2001

B047/B048 6-4 SM

SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal

DefinitionTotal counter does not operate.

Points to Check• Main board• AC Drive board

SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal

DefinitionThe zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second of turning on the mainswitch.

Point to Check• Main board• AC Drive board

SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal

DefinitionAfter sending the reset signal, the main switch does not turn off within 0.45second.

Point to check• Main switch• Main board

SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature

DefinitionWhile in the copy ready state, the machine detects 3 or more hot rollertemperature changes within 60 seconds, or 2 or more within 2 seconds. Thechange must be greater than 20°C in 1 second.

Point to Check• The thermistor is out of position

SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light

DefinitionIn the copy ready condition, the fusing lamp turns on at full power continuouslyfor more than 120 seconds while the hot roller is not rotating.

- Point to check -• Poor thermistor cable connection• Poor fusing unit connection

BLOWN FUSE TABLE

SM 6-5 B047/B048

Tro

ub

le-

sho

oti

ng

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Europe VersionFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU301 250 V 3.15 A No power.FU302 250 V 6.3 AFU303 250 V 6.3 AFU304 250 V 6.3 A

No indication. Beeper sounds.This symptom will occur when all of threefuses are open.

U.S.A. VersionFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU301 125 V 6.3 A No power.FU302 250 V 5 AFU303 250 V 5 AFU304 250 V 5 A

No indication. Beeper sounds.This symptom will occur when all of threefuses are open.

AC Drive BoardFuse No. Specification Symptom

FU201 125 V 15 A(U.S.A. version only)

No power.

FU202 250 1 A No power is supplied to the de-humidifyheater.

CB201 250 V 8 A(Europe version only)

No power.

ROLL FEED UNITB435/B436

SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-1 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

Roll Paper Size: Width:210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"

Length:150 meters

Diameter:Less than φ170 mm

Cut Size: –Preset Cut:1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm48", 36", 24", 18", 12" 46", 34", 22", 17", 11"Up to 10 extra preset cut lengths can be set usingSP23 ~ 32.

–Selected Length Cut:297 mm to 3,000 mm (1 mm per step) 11" to 118"(0.1" per step)

Paper Transport Velocity: 60 mm/s

Control: Microprocessor

Power Source: +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier

Power Consumption: Maximum 110 W

Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,200 mm x 720 mm x 775 mm47.24" x 28.35" x 30.51"

Weight: 78 kg, 171.6 lbs (1 roll)86 kg, 189.2 lbs (2 rolls)


B435/B436 7-2 SM

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side ofthe Point to Point index (Water proof paper).

Name Function Index No.MotorsCutter Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). 59Roll Feed Drives all mechanical components except

the cutter unit (Dc Stepper Motor). 61

Magnetic ClutchesRoll Feed 1 Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the 1st

roll feed roller. 56

Roll Feed 2 Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the2nd roll feed roller.

60

SwitchesRight Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at the

right home position.54

Left Cutter Detects whether or not the cutter is at theleft home position. 57

Dehumidity Turns on the RF Dehumidity heaters whennot copying. 62

SensorsPaper End 1 Detects when the roll runs out of paper. 51Paper End 2 Detects when the roll runs out of paper. 50Leading Edge Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading

edge of the paper, triggering the paperlength pulse count.

55

Door Indicates “Door Open” on the operationpanel and disables the key operation. 58

Printed Circuit BoardRF Drive Controls all roll feed unit functions

accordance with copier CPU. 49

OthersRF Dehumidity Heater 1 Removes humidity from the roll paper. 53RF Dehumidity Heater 2 Removes humidity from the roll paper. 52

MECHANICAL OPERATION

SM 7-3 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6


2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION

There are two types of the roll feed unit. B435 Roll feed unit has one roll feed unit(1st [A]). B436 Roll feed unit has two roll feed units (1st [A] and 2nd [B]). The cutterunit [C] uses a sliding rotary cutting blade.

When turning on the main switch or when roll paper is replenished, the roll feedmotor rotates and the leading edge of the roll paper is fed until the roll lead edgesensor [D] is activated. Then, the leading edge of the roll paper is returned to thepaper feed start position (60 mm before the cutter unit).

B436D501.WMF

B436D103.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]


B435/B436 7-4 SM

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper isdirected to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotatingonce the registration sensor detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The copypaper stops and waits for the original. Shortly after the original registration sensoris activated by the original, the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start torotate. The copy paper starts to feed again.

Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feedmotor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper.When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor stops and the cutterunit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor has stopped, theregistration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The paper is cut duringthe time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled taut. This allows for a neat cut.

When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 340 mm, the paper reachesthe selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again. In this case,after the registration roller stops, the roll paper feed motor continues to rotate and apaper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. The registration roller brakeensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers as theexcess paper is fed forwards. The paper is then cut.

When the selected cut length is between 340 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unitcuts the paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. [RW1]

The paper buckle forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, becausethe paper feed roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. Theregistration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate theregistration rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.

B436D502.WMF

[A]

[B]


SM 7-5 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6

2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION

The roll paper end sensor [A] is located above each roll. When the roll paper runsout and the roll paper end sensor detects the black core of the roll, roll end isindicated on the operation panel. If the paper is not caught by the feed rollers,paper feed fails. In this case, roll end is indicated instead of a paper misfeedindication.

2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

The roll feed exit roller [B] is driven by the roll feed motor [C] through timing belts[D] and gears [E]. The feed roller [F] of each roll feed unit is driven by the roll feedmotor through the belt and each gear and each roll feed clutch [G]. Each feed rollercan be driven manually by each knob [H].

B436D503.WMF

B436D102.WMF

[C]

[H]

[B]

[A]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]


B435/B436 7-6 SM

2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixedblade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper inboth directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter.The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary cutting bladeknob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

B436D104.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

SM 7-7 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6


3.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the roll feed unit’s front cover [A] (2 screws and 4 hooks) and left innercover [B] (2 screws).

2. Remove the left tray lock lever [C] (1 screw and 1 spring) and tray stopper [D](2 shoulder screws and 1 spring).

3. Remove the two screws [E] and disconnect the three connectors [F].NOTE: When removing and/or reinstalling the connectors, take care not to

damage the harnesses. Make sure that you do not pinch the harnesseswhen reinserting the cutter unit.

4. Slide the cutter unit [G] out as shown.

B436R103.WMF

B436R102.WMF

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[G]

[E]

[F]

[F]

ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

B435/B436 7-8 SM

3.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSORREPLACEMENT

1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the sensor casing [A] (2 screws).

3. Replace the leading edge sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).

NOTE: When reinstalling the sensor casing, be sure to align the sensor casing’spins [C] with the holes [D] in the sensor bracket.

B436R107.WMF

[A]

[C][B]

[D]

ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

SM 7-9 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6

3.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

1. Pull out the roll feed unit [A].

2. Remove the 4 screws [B] (right side 2 screws and left side 2 screws).

3. Lift the roll feed unit and place it gently onto the floor or other flat surface.

B436R101.WMF

[A]

[B]

[B]

ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

B435/B436 7-10 SM

3.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.

3. Remove the roll feed paper guide plate [A] (4 screws).

4. Remove the roller knob bracket [B] (1 screw).

5. Remove the snap ring [C] and two retaining rings [D] and two bushings [E].

6. Disconnect the connector for the roll feed clutch harness [F] (2 clamps).

7. Remove the roll feed roller [G] and clutch [H] (1 retaining ring and 1 timing belt[I]).

NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the clutch, make sure that the clutch pin [J] is set inthe cutout [K] of the stopper.

2) After putting all the parts back, turn the roller knob and verify that thetiming belt drives the roll feed roller.

B436R105.WMF

B436R104.WMF

[A]

[H]

[C]

[E]

[D]

[J]

[E]

[D]

[K] [F]

[G]

[I][B]

ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

SM 7-11 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6

3.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.

3. Remove the four screws [A] securing the roll feed motor, then remove the rollfeed motor [B] (1 connector).

[B]

[A]

ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

B435/B436 7-12 SM

3.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the 2 screws [A] holding the clamps for the power supply cord.

2. Remove the roll feed rear cover [B] (6 screws).

3. Remove the roll end sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 hook).

4. Replace the roll end sensor [D] (1 screw and 1 connector).

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]

CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

SM 7-13 B435/B436

Ro

ll F

eed

Un

itB

435/

B43

6

3.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed tocorrect cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factorywithout the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier onwhich it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length asfollows:NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying

because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length temporarily.

Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: ±±±±3 mm (for Length Shorter than 420mm) ±±±±5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) ±±±±11 mm (3,000 mm)

NOTE: 1) There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperaturemode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.[Normal (SP#42, 45, 87), High (SP#43, 46, 88), Low (SP#44, 47, 89)].

2) There are two settings of SP#42 to 47 when the 2 rolls feeder isinstalled. Adjust the 2nd roll cut length by the same manner of the 1stroll cut length adjustment. Repeat the same steps after 1st roll cutlength adjustment.

1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in thepreset cut mode.

2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and presetcut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.

3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length iswithin the adjustment standards.

1) Current SP data #42....0Copy sample length = 297 + 4Set SP mode #42...–4.0

Example:

2) Current SP data #42....0Copy sample length = 297 – 4Set SP mode #42...+4.0

4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and checktheir length.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.

6. Make 5 copy samples of 3,000 mm length. Make sure the average cut length iswithin the adjustment standards.

7. If it is not within the adjustment standards, change the values using SP modes#87 to 89.

SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

B435/B436 7-14 SM

3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

1. Raise the lever [A] in the left roll holder [B].

2. Adjust the roll paper side position. Lower the lever to fix the position.

[A]

[B]

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

BULLETIN NUMBER: 740-001 05/12/95APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

GENERAL:The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information should beincorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

•• UPDATE NO. 1 - SPRING HOOK - The old style Spring Hook (54199653) is no longer produced.However, the two new style Spring Hooks (shown below) have been madeavailable as replacement options.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

54199653 Spring Hook 1 45 6

A1639504 Spring Hook - SS-22 1 45 6

A1639505 Spring Hook - SS-21 1 45 10** DENOTES NEW ITEM

•• UPDATE NO. 2 - OPERATING SHEET - Please add the Operating Sheet to your Parts Catalog as indicated below.

REFERENCE

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

A1631385 Operating Sheet 1 7 27** DENOTES NEW ITEM

OLD Spring Hook - SS-21

Spring Hook - SS-22

NEW

Operating Sheet

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINBULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 002 10/11/95

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

SUBJECT: GROUNDING PLATE SPRING AND BUSHINGS

GENERAL:

To ensure grounding of the Lower Entrance Guide, the Grounding Plate Spring has been replaced by theGrounding Wire as shown below. Also, the material of the Exit Unit Bushing has been changed. Thisinformation should be incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

A1634464 Grounding Plate Spring

A1635640 Grounding Wire 1 1 1 29 7

08053385 Bushing - 6mm

50530447 Bushing - 6mm 2 2 1 31 103

UNITS AFFECTED:

All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3844120069 will have the new style Grounding Wireand Exit Unit Bushings installed during production.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

No

te: This copy intended as m

aster of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

F S

M C

OP

Y Q

UA

LIT

Y M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PAR

TS

PAP

ER

PAT

H E

LE

CT

RIC

AL

OT

HE

R

13. PAPER EXIT SECTION 2 (A163)

The material of this bushinghas been changed.

The material of this bushinghas been changed.

Grounding PlateSpring

Grounding Wire

12. PAPER EXIT SECTION 1



SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 1-1 Additional Information Developer Type

• 4-11 Additional Information Addition of SP Mode 15


F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

RTS

PAP

ER

PAT

H E

LEC

TRIC

AL

OTH

ER

Note: This copy intended as m




SUBJECT: ENERGY STAR MODIFICATION (DETAILS)

GENERAL:To conserve energy, the copier automatically turns "OFF" 30 minutes after the last copy job has beencompleted. The details of the machine operation are as follows:

•• AUTO OFF MODE To automatically turn "OFF" the copier, a new type of Main Switch with anincorporated coil is used. The connector layout is shown below.

•• SP MODE New software (ROM A1635208) provides an additional SP Mode to adjust theAuto Off Timer. Replace page 4-11 of the Field Service Manual with the updatedpage provided with this package.

Mode No. Function Settings

15 Auto off time can be selected 1~ 120 minutes (1 minute per step) Default : 30 minutes

The Auto Off time can also be selected by the customer. Refer to page 3 of this bulletin for the procedure.

Continued...

AC Harness

Upper DC Harness

Lower DC Harness

Main Switch

Relay


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R

F S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RTS

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004Page 2 of 4

The Auto Off mode is prohibited during the following conditions:

* The roll feeder is operating* A sheet of paper is set on the feed table* A Jam or SC indicator is "ON"* The Toner End indicator is "ON" or the Used Toner Bottle is full

NOTE: When you use a new style Main Board (modified for Energy Star) in a non-Energy Star machine,remove the ROM (A1635208) from the new Main Board and install ROM (A1639506) in its place.

Also, when you replace the RAM Board, please clear all memory (SP1-21) and input the factorydata referring to the Field Service Manual.

NOTE: For part numbers, refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-005

•• INSTRUCTION SHEET

An additional explanation sheet has been added to the operating instructions. Please make copies of thefollowing two pages and add them to the operating instructions that were shipped with the copier.

Continued...


Continued...





GENERAL:To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.

NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin#PUB-066.

REFERENCE


A1631095 A1631100 Right Latch Bracket 1 1 3/S 35 23

12041545 12042421 Main SW 1 1 3/S 35 118

A1631257 A1631256 Lower Right Front Cover - 115V 1 1 3/S 7 15

A1635600 A1635702 AC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 3

A1635605 A1635704 Lower DC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 5

A1635608 A1635706 Upper DC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 4

A1635206 A1635208 ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) 1 1 3/S 39 1

A1635200 A1635230 Main Board 1 1 3/S 35 7

12081392 Relay 0 1 35 119*

A1638637 Operating Instructions - Energy Star 0 1 43 6** DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the parts listed above installedduring production.

AC Harness

Upper DCHarness

Lower DC Harness

Main Switch

RelayRelay (new part)


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R

F S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RTS

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINBULLETIN NUMBER: FW740 - 005 REISSUE 03/20/96



GENERAL:To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.

NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin#PUB-066.

REFERENCE


A1631095 A1631100 Right Latch Bracket 1 1 3/S 35 23

12041545 12042421 Main SW 1 1 3/S 35 118

A1631257 A1631256 Lower Right Front Cover - 115V 1 1 3/S 7 15

A1635600 A1635702 AC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 3

A1635605 A1635704 Lower DC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 5

A1635608 A1635706 Upper DC Harness 1 1 3/S 35 4

A1635206 A1635208 ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) 1 1 3/S 39 1

A1635200 A1635230 Main Board 1 1 3/S 35 7

12081392 Relay 0 1 35 119*

A1638637 Operating Instructions - Energy Star 0 1 43 6** DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the parts listed above installedduring production.

AC Harness

Upper DCHarness

Lower DC Harness

Main Switch

RelayRelay (new part)


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R

F S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RTS



SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 5-19 Updated Information


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS




GENERAL:The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information should beincorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

•• UPDATE NO. 1 - T & S CORONA CASING - To meet CE Mark Standards, the following parts havebeen changed.

REFERENCE


AD023113 A1633130 T & S Corona Casing 1 → 1 0 25 9

A1635450 A1635455 Quenching Lamp 1 → 1 0 23 38

A1632254 A1632257 Grounding Spring Plate 1 → 1 0 37 26

A1635440 A1635439 Pre - Transfer Lamp - 24V 7.2W 1 → 1 0 15 1

A1633867 A1633869 T & S Corona Guide Plate 1 → 1 0 17 9

A1634120 A1634121 Fusing Lower Stay 1 → 1 0 27 28

A1635636 A1635637 Separation Power Pack Harness 1 → 1 0 35 14

A1635200 A1635230 Main Control Board 1 → 1 0 3540

7*

UNITS AFFECTED:All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the new style T & S CoronaCasing, etc... installed during production.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.



3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 007Page 2 of 2

•• UPDATE NO. 2 - PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - Add Spacer (A1634355) to your PartsCatalog as indicated below.

REFERENCE


A163 4355 Spacer - Fusing Entrance 0 → 1 27 39

Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

Spacer - Fusing Entrance25mm

20 mm



SUBJECT: ORIGINAL STOPPERS

GENERAL:Rubber tubes have been added on the both right and left original stoppers to ensure that the originalstoppers are being held in position. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW740 PartsCatalog documentation.

REFERENCE


AA161118 Tube - 3 x 4.5 x 3 0 2 7 28** DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:Not available at time of publication.


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

Left Original Stopper

RubberTubes Right Original Stopper



SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG ADDITIONS

GENERAL:The following Parts Catalog additions are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information shouldbe incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE

NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

AW020012 Photointeruptor 1 15 13*

03130100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 X 10 1 15 130** DENOTES NEW ITEM


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

Photointeruptor

Philips Pan Head ScrewPage 14



SUBJECT: FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

GENERAL:To achieve optimal copy quality, it may be necessary to adjust the fusing temperature based on the type ofcopy paper used and the specific environmental conditions in which the machine is located. The tablesbelow demonstrate how to adjust the fusing temperature to compensate for these factors.

Environmental conditions: L/L ------ 15°C, 20%RHM/M ---- 23°C, 65%RHH/H ----- 30°C, 80%RH

1. Plain Paper

Paper T6200/T6000 Azon Bond Azon RecycledBond

Regma 61gr Regma 75-80gr

Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/HMode 8Mode 7Mode 6Mode 5Mode 4Mode 3 O O O O OMode 2 O O O O O OMode 1 O O O O

Paper Regma 90gr Regma 110gr Ozalid EF-WeissEnviron L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/HMode 8Mode 7 O O OMode 6 O OMode 5 OMode 4Mode 3 OMode 2 OMode 1 O

Continued...


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS


2. Vellum

Paper TA-70 Azon Vellum Erazable Vellum Regma 91grEnviron L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/HMode 8 O O OMode 7 OMode 6 O O O O O OMode 5 O OMode 4Mode 3Mode 2Mode 1

3. Film

Paper Azon Film 3mil Azon Film 4mil Regma Film 3mil Regma Film 4mil Hoechst Film4mil

Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/HMode 8Mode 7Mode 6Mode 5Mode 4 O O O O O O O O OMode 3 O O O O O OMode 2Mode 1

FOR NON-LISTED PAPERS :

The following is the procedure to determine the best Fusing Temperature Setting for each type of paper.The best setting is said to be the highest position before creasing begins to appear.

1. Set the Fusing Temperature Setting to the maximum mode for the type of paper, such as PlainPaper, Vellum, or Film using SP #1, SP #2 or SP #3.

Plain Paper: Mode 7 (SP #1) Vellum: Mode 8 (SP #2)Film: Mode 5 (SP #3)

2. Make 3 white copies with the largest size of the paper available in the vertical grain direction. Whitecopy is the worst case for creasing.

3. Check whether creasing appears on any of the copies.

4. If creasing appears, lower the Fusing Temperature Setting by 1 and repeat Steps # 2~4.



SUBJECT: PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

GENERAL:The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure roller should be replaced.

1. Access SP mode with the steps below.In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key, Clear/Stop key, press and hold theClear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds.

2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below.a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicator lights. If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, press Function Select key until it lights.b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select Lamp Off Mode.)c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off Mode.)e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.

3. To prevent a paper misfeed, create a lead edge margin with the steps below. a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value) is indicated.

4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper or thicker plain paper withvertical grain direction.

Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to the mode which is one step lower thanthe proper setting for the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper setting is Mode 3,select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB No. FW740-010 for more information regarding theproper settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment procedure for non-listed papers.

5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately 5 times.

6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with the scraped parts of thepressure roller. If white lines and/or bands appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a newone.

7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp Off Mode", "Lead Margin"and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the original settings.


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERTThe Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow

• 4-38 Additional Information Pressure Roller Evaluation Procedure



SUBJECT: PHOTOINTERUPTOR

GENERAL:The Photointeruptor shown below is missing from the Parts Catalog. This information should be added to allexisting FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE


AW020024 Photointeruptor 1 15 14


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L PA

PE

R PA

TH

ELE

CTR

ICA

L O

THE

R



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

9

14




GENERAL:The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. The following informationshould be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

•• UPDATE NO. 1 - PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER - To prevent the Pressure Roller from beingdamaged, the following modifications have been made.

1. The material of the Strippers has been changed from metal to a Teflon-coated resin to decrease thefriction level on the Pressure Roller.

2. Springs have been added to press the Strippers against the Pressure Roller.

3. A Stopper Guide Plate has been added to prevent the Pressure Roller from contacting the Paper ExitCover when it is bent.

NOTE: The proper fusing temperature setting for each type of throughput material is very important to keepthe Fusing and Pressure Rollers in good condition for as long as possible. Please refer to TechService Bulletin No. 010.Please also refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. 011 regarding how to judge whether the PressureRoller is still usable or not.


NEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.



3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...


ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

LEC

TRIC

AL

OTH

ER



F S M

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PAR

TS

40

43

42

31

41


REFERENCE


A1634171 Pressure Roller Stripper 1 → 0 1 27 31

A1634175 Pressure Roller Stripper Ass’y 0 → 1 1 27 31

A1744155 Stopper Guide - Paper Exit 0 → 1 1 27 40*

AE044020 Pressure Roller Stripper 0 → 16 27 41*

AA066285 Stripper Spring 0 → 16 27 42*

A1634176 Stripper Stay Bracket 0 → 1 27 43** DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3846060120 will have the new Pressure RollerStrippers installed during production.

•• UPDATE NO. 2 - ORIGINAL FEED TABLE ASSEMBLY - As per field request, the Original FeedTable Assembly has been registered as a service part.

REFERENCE


A1636111 Original Feed Table - LT 1 9 29*

A1636113 Original Feed Table - A4 1 9 29** DENOTES NEW ITEM

29

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*;KHN#g#NEH NLfFMfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *;KHN

SUBJECT: T/S CORONA UNIT

GENERAL:

A part number has been assigned to the T/S Corona Unit. This information should be incorporated into allexisting FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE

NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

A1633849 T/S Corona Unit (EU) 1 25 *

A1633850 T/S Corona Unit (NA) 1 25 *

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

O

TH

ER

Note: T

his copy intended as master of original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

F

S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RT

S

UKHNhNEINEfFKfNL

UKHN

SUBJECT: BLANK COPIES

SYMPTOM:Intermittent blank copies, partially blank copies or blank copies.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:1. Arcing from Charge Corona.2. Arcing from the High Voltage Leads / Receptacles.3. No voltage output from the C, G, B Power Pack.4. Fuse 3 Open.

SOLUTION:Inspect the following parts for proper operation and/or signs of arching. Replace the parts as necessary.

1. Relay Receptacle - Charge Corona (AD021113).2. Charge Corona Receptacle (AD021114).3. Charge Corona Assembly (A1632050).4. Power Pack - C, G, B (AZ320079).5. Power Supply (AZ230056).6. Fuse 3 on Power Supply.

NOTE: Inspect Grid Wire routing (see illustration below). Ensure that wire junctions are positioned asshown and staggered. If the wires cross or touch each other, arcing or copy quality problems may occur.

Note: T

his copy intended as master of original


C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

S

M

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

P

AR

TS

P

AP

ER

PA

TH

O

TH

ER


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJG#g#gNNE NHfFMfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#g#*;KHN####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: SPRING REPLACEMENT – CHARG

SYMPTOM:

Difficulty when replacing Charge Corona Wires.

CAUSE:

The angle of the opening on the Spring is only 45°, and this mnotch in the Right End Block made it difficult to attach the Spr

SOLUTION:

The angle on the opening of the Spring has been changed frowith less pulling. Also the length of the notch in the Right Endmm so the spring end with a diameter of 3 mm can be hookebelow.

4

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all A163

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPAA060124 AA060749 SpringAD022336 AD022348 Right End Block- C

Note: T

his copy is intended as a master original


The chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the A163 series.

Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner N/ARicoh 015Savin N/A

E CORONA UNIT

akes it difficult to attach the spring. Also theing from above.

m 45° to 90° so the Spring can be replaced Block has been changed from 4 mm to 2.9

d from above. See the Before and After figures

B e fo re

B e fo re

A fte r

A fte r2 .9 m m4 .0 m m

5 ° 9 0 °

Parts Catalogs.REFERENCE

TION QTY INT PAGE ITEM5 0 23 9

harge 1 0 23 14

Continued…

P

AR

TS

Tech Service Bulletin No. A163 – 001Page 2 of 2

UNITS AFFECTED:

All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have new style parts installed duringproduction.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERGestetner N/A N/ARicoh FW740 A3847050073

Savin N/A N/A


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines.

2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.

3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or unitspreviously modified, use the new individual part numbers.


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJGg#NNF NIfEIfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#h#*;KHN####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: UPDATED ENERGY STAR REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL:

The following parts updates are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalog.

• UPDATE 1:

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

A1638637 A1638647 Operating Instructions– Energy Star(115V)

1 3 43 6

• UPDATE 2:

Mode No. Old Data New Data15 Auto Shut-Off Time Setting (115 V) 1 to 120 Minutes

(1 Minute per step)Default: 30 Minutes

1 to 240 Minutes(1 Minute per step)Default: 30 Minutes

REFERENCEPART NO. DESCRIPTION OLD SUFFIX NEW SUFFIX QTY PAGE ITEMA1635208 ROM No Suffix A 1 39 1A1635230 Main Board A B 1 35 7

The Main Board ROM revision A (file name 740A1A.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh TechnicalServices BBS.

NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/NBBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.


NEW machines.2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.


1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.

3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or unitspreviously modified, use the new individual part numbers.

Note: T



OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS – The Operating Instructionshave been changed to announce changes concerningEnergy Star (115V).

AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME – Auto Shut-Off Time has beenchanged from “1 to 120 minutes” to “1 to 240 minutes”. Thechange has been made to SP Mode 15. See Table below.

FIR

MW

AR

E

#'328630#23T#FLI

RICO

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U %EJG#g#NNG NKfFFfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#h#*;KHN####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: SMALL CAP

GENERAL:

The part number for the Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) was incorrect. The following partcorrection is being issued for all A571 Parts Catalog Sections.

OL

Note: T



P

AR

TS

H GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 296

REFERENCED PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEMA5717479 A5717497 Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) 1 3 19


U EJGfFIEfFIFgNNH EEfEMfML

Uhf hKHNfKINfKJN hf

SUBJECT: INSTALLATION CHECK – GROUNDING WIRES

SYMPTOM:

Paper jams at the Registration Roller.

CAUSE:

The ground wire is positioned behind the Main Board on the Roll Feeder.

NOTE: This can result in an electrical short.

SOLUTION:

Ensure that both Ground Wires are attached. (See Illustration Below)

No

te: This copy is intended as a m

aster original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

n

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L n

PA

PE

R P

AT

H

Attach the Long Wire [C] tothe copier.

Attach the Short Wire [B] tothe stand.

NOTE-1: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wires until the spring washer’s [A] are flattened

NOTE-2: Ensure that both wires are connected before powering up the copier.

CONTROL NO. 316


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 005 02/14/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – N/A RICOH – FW740/750/760 SAVIN – N/A

SUBJECT: OVERTONING

SYMPTOMS:

1. Background may appear on the copy.2. The Used Toner Tank may fill up before the “Toner Overflow Indicator” begins to light.

CAUSE:

As developer deteriorates, the charge on the toner will gradually drop. This may cause excess toner to besupplied to the Development Unit and cause the toner density to become too high.

SOLUTION:

The software controlling the toner supply ratio has been changed.

In the new software, the TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio) has been changed as follows:

TS Level 0 1 2 3 4 5Old No supply 7.5% 15% 30% 50% 100%New No supply 7.5% 7.5% 7.5% 15% 100%

NOTE: The suffix of the ROM has been changed from A1635208A to A1635208B (FW740), A2515228C to A2515228D (FW750), & A2525238C to A2525238D (FW760).

The Main PCB ROM revision “D” file name A251MA1D.EXE (FW750), file name A252MA1D.EXE (FW760)and ROM Revision “B” file name A163ma1B.exe (FW740) can be downloaded through the Ricoh TechnicalServices FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:

All A251 and A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new firmwareinstalled during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERRicoh FW740 N/ARicoh FW750 A7829020131Ricoh FW760 A7839020084

Note: T



! P

AR

TS

! F

IRM

WA

RE

! C

OP

Y Q

UA

LIT

Y

CONTROL NO. 018WID



BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 006 02/14/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – N/A RICOH – FW760 SAVIN – N/A

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL JAM

SYMPTOM:

When feeding thick paper, the Original Feed Motor may lock up.

CAUSE:

There is not enough torque for the Original Feed Motor when thick originals are being used.

SOLUTIONS:

To improve the machine performance, the follow countermeasure has been implemented.

1. The software has been modified to increase the torque of the Original Feed Motor.

NOTE: The part number A2525238 of the ROM is the same only the suffix haschanged from “C” to “D”.

2. The spring tension for the timing belt has been decreased.

NOTE: The part number of the spring has been changed from AA060541 to AA060824.

3. The bushing on the right side only, for both original drive roller (AF020451) are lubricated with MobilTemp 78 to decrease the friction load.

The PCB ROM revision “D” (file name A252MA1D.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh TechnicalServices FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:

All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new firmware installedduring production. All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial number listed will have the bushingslubricated during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERRicoh FW760 A7839020084

Note: T



!

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L

! M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

! P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 018WID

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - A163/A251/A252 - A163/A251/A252 - A163/A251/A252 - 007007007007 11/20/200011/20/200011/20/200011/20/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW740/750/760 RICOH FW740/750/760 RICOH FW740/750/760 RICOH FW740/750/760 SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• 1-1 Updated Information (Specifications Page – STM)

• 1-1 Updated Information (Specifications Page – FSM)

No



! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

CONTROL NO. 006WID




Original SkewTolerance:


Copy Size: Same as "Original Size"


First Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)

Warm-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)

Multi-Copy: 1 to 1 only

Automatic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be setto 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)


Drum Charge: Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)




Development: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2 bags)

Toner Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)



Toner Density Control: Direct toner density detection by inductionsensor




Rev. 11/2000

2 mm/400mm⇒ Ove

rall

Mac

hin

eIn

form

atio

n

A163 1-1 STM




Orig

Cop

Cop

Firs

War

Mult

Auto

Pho

Drum

Rep

Exp

Exp

Dev

Ton

Ton

Dev

Ton

Ima

Pap

Clea

Rev. 11/2000

Original Skew 2 mm/400mmTolerance:

⇒

Ove

rall

Mac

hin

eIn

form

atio

n

FSM

ize: Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

t

t

o

o

e

e

e

e

e

g

e

inal S
Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
y Size: Same as "Original Size"

ying Speed: 3 cpm (A1/D sideways)

Copy: 24 seconds (A1/D sideways)

m-up Time: Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)

i-Copy: 1 to 1 only

matic Reset: 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be setto 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)

oconductor: Organic photoconductor drum

Charge: Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)

roduction Ratio: 1 : 1 (±0.5%)

sure System: Slit exposure via fiber optic array

sure Lamp: Fluorescent lamp (26 W)

lopment: Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2bags)

r Replenishment: Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)

r Consumption: 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)

lopment Bias: Negative

r Density Control: Direct toner density detection by inductionsensor

e Density Adjustment: Development bias control + exposure control

r Separation: Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls

ning: Cleaning blade

1-1 A163

Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.


BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 0A163/A251/A252 - 0A163/A251/A252 - 0A163/A251/A252 - 008080808 03/03/03/03/19/200219/200219/200219/2002

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NA RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 SAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: POWER PACK (C.G.B.)

GENERAL:

The Power Pack (C.G.B.) part number has been changed as shown below. In addition, the shape of thePower Pack has been modified to facilitate factory assembly.

The following part correction is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

AZ320079 AZ320099 Power Pack – C.G.B 1 1 55 14

UNITS AFFECTED:

All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new stylePower Pack – C.G.B installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERGestetner NA

Ricoh FW740 Service parts onlyRicoh FW750 A7820010001Ricoh FW760 A7830010032

Savin NA


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.




3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Note: T



!

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L !

PA

RT

S

CONTROL NO 011WID



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 – 009A163/A251/A252 – 009A163/A251/A252 – 009A163/A251/A252 – 009 03/03/03/03/19/200219/200219/200219/2002

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NAGESTETNER - NA RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 RICOH – FW740/FW750/FW760 SAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SPACER

GENERAL:

Please add the following component, which was omitted from the Parts Catalog:The following part addition is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

AA132097 Spacer 1 19 44*

*DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

Note: T



! P

AR

TS

Item 44 Spacer AA132097

CONTROL NO 011WID


Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 – 011 11/05/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – N/A LANIER – N/A RICOH – FW740/750/760 SAVIN – N/A SUBJECT: LEFT AND RIGHT PAPER GUIDE GENERAL: Two additional paper guides (pawls) have been added to the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit to further ensure that the copy paper does not come into contact with the corona wire if a jam occurs in this area. This addition effectively decreases the space between each pawl.

NOTE: When replacing with the modified parts for the first time, they must be installed together as a set.

The following part update is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

PA

RTS

Tech Service Bulletin No. A163/A251/A252 – 011

Page 2 of 2

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

A1633858 Left Paper Guide 2 - 0 B0473858 Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Left 0 - 2 1 25 1

A1633857 Right Paper Guide 2 - 0 B0473857 Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Right 0 - 2 1 25 2

UNITS AFFECTED: All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Guides installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Ricoh FW740 Service Parts Only Ricoh FW750 Service Parts Only Ricoh FW760 Service Parts Only


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.


1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.


3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U %IKE#g#NNE NMfEEfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#h#6300#*))()6#(14#*;KHN####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: SMALL CAP

GENERAL:

The following part correction is being issued for the A571 Pa

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRA5717479 A5717497 Small Cap (A163 RI

Note: T



T
he chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the A571 series.
Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner NARicoh 5000Savin NA

rts Section.

P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 304

REFERENCEIPTION QTY PAGE ITEMC/NRG)(A251/A252) 1 3 19

RI

U LGJgNNE EEfNJfML

Uhf h(14KJN hf

SUBJECT: REAR COPY TRAY

GENERAL:

The following parts updates are being issued for all A836 Parts Catalog Section.

No



n

PA

RT

S

COH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 314

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

A8364465 A86364469 Rear Copy Tray – Small (760S) 6 3 16A8364468 Rear Copy Tray Sheet – Center 1→0 3 19A1744493 Copy Tray Sheet 2→0 3 20



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 B047/B048 B047/B048 B047/B048 001 001 001 001 02/07/200202/07/200202/07/200202/07/2002

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER NA GESTETNER NA GESTETNER NA GESTETNER NA RICOH FW770/FW780 RICOH FW770/FW780 RICOH FW770/FW780 RICOH FW770/FW780 SAVIN NASAVIN NASAVIN NASAVIN NA

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL FEED RIGHT PLATE AND FIBER OPTICS

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEINCORRECT

PART NO.CORRECTPART NO.

DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

A1636061 B0476061 Original Feed Right Plate 1 9 23

Note: T



! P

AR

TS

Incorrect: Illustration and Part number

Index Part number Description12 A2521611 Fiber Optics (B048)25 B0471630 Fiber Optics (B047)25 B0481630 Fiber Optics (B048)

Correct: Illustration and Part number

Index Part number Description12 B0471640 Fiber Optics (B047)12 B0481640 Fiber Optics (B048)

25

CONTROL NO 010WID



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 002B047/B048 - 002B047/B048 - 002B047/B048 - 002 07/15/200207/15/200207/15/200207/15/2002

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA RICOH – FW770/FW780 RICOH – FW770/FW780 RICOH – FW770/FW780 RICOH – FW770/FW780 SAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NASAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒ .

PAGES:

• 4-25 Jam Code Table (Updated Information).

No



! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L



BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 003 06/23/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – A040/A041 LANIER – LW110/LW111 RICOH – FW770/FW780 SAVIN – 7700W/7800W SUBJECT: TONER HOPPER JOINT SHAFT GENERAL: To ensure that the gear (AB017378) does not break when the toner cartridge is installed without being shaken, the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft has been changed as shown below. The following parts updates are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

NOTE: Make sure developer does not get into the joint shaft unit assembly when the developer is replaced. If developer gets into the joint part, disassemble the unit and clean it immediately. If the developer were to remain in the assembly, it would cause joint operation problems due to excessive mechanical load and parts wear.

Seal – 22x52x0.5

Spring – 10N

Joint Shaft – Toner Hopper

Joint Shaft Unit – Toner Hopper

Toner Supply Clutch

Toner Supply Unit Plate

Shaft Holder

E - Ring

Left Side Plate

Tech Service Bulletin No. B047/B048 – 003

Page 2 of 2


AD001036 AD001047 Development Unit 1 - 1 3/S 23 * A1633147 Joint Shaft – Toner Hopper 1 - 0 X/X 23 23

B0473100 Joint Shaft Unit – Toner Hopper 0 - 1 3/S 23 23 B0103211 Seal – 22x52x0.5 0 - 1 3/S 23 37* B0103212 Spring – 10N 0 - 1 3/S 23 38*

* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

NOTE: The new parts cannot be installed in the old Development Unit (#AD001036), as the left side plate has been changed (which is not available as a service part).

UNITS AFFECTED: All B047/B048 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style parts installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER RICOH FW770 Gestetner A040 SAVIN 7700W Lanier LW110

H8630400001

RICOH FW780 Gestetner A040 SAVIN 7800W Lanier LW111

H8730400001


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.


1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.


3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.



BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 – 004 07/15/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – A040/A041 LANIER – LW110/LW111 RICOH – FW770/FW780 SAVIN – 7700W/7800W SUBJECT: RECEIVING TRAY COVER GENERAL: The Receiving Tray Cover item 14 was incorrectly listed in the B047/B048 Parts Catalog. Please delete Items 14 and 104 from the parts list and the illustration as shown below. The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.


B0471331 - Receiving Tray Cover 1 → 0 - 7 12 04340082B - Tapping Screw – M4x8 n - 3 - 7 104

PA

RTS

Deleted: Item 14 & Item 104 Deleted: Items 104

Documents

Manual Field Servicio Fw740